Add svn:eol-style property to source files, so that the line endings are correctly converted to the target system's native end of line style.

27 files changed, 5740 insertions, 5740 deletions

diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c
index 0e08d57fe..068f628f7 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,255 +1,255 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 

- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine

- *  the device's capabilities and functions.  

- */

- 

-#include "Descriptors.h"

-

-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall

- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the

- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration

- *  process begins.

- */

-USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =

-{

-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},

-		

-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),

-	.Class                  = 0x02,

-	.SubClass               = 0x00,

-	.Protocol               = 0x00,

-				

-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,

-		

-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,

-	.ProductID              = 0x204C,

-	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,

-		

-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,

-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,

-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,

-		

-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS

-};

-

-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage

- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces

- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting

- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.

- */

-USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =

-{

-	.Config = 

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},

-

-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),

-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,

-				

-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,

-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,

-				

-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),

-			

-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)

-		},

-		

-	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},

-

-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,

-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,

-			

-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,

-				

-			.Class                  = 0x02,

-			.SubClass               = 0x02,

-			.Protocol               = 0xFF,

-				

-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR

-		},

-

-	.CDC_Functional_Header = 

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},

-			.SubType                = 0x00,

-			

-			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}

-		},

-		

-	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},

-			.SubType                = 0x02,

-			

-			.Data                   = {0x00}

-		},

-	

-	.CDC_Functional_Union = 

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},

-			.SubType                = 0x06,

-			

-			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}

-		},

-

-	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},

-			

-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),

-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),

-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,

-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x02

-		},

-

-	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},

-

-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,

-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,

-			

-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,

-				

-			.Class                  = 0x0A,

-			.SubClass               = 0x00,

-			.Protocol               = 0x00,

-				

-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR

-		},

-

-	.RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint = 

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},

-			 

-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),

-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),

-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,

-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00

-		},

-		

-	.RNDIS_DataInEndpoint = 

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},

-			

-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),

-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),

-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,

-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00

-		}

-};

-

-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests

- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate

- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.

- */

-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =

-{

-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},

-		

-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}

-};

-

-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable

- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device

- *  Descriptor.

- */

-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =

-{

-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},

-		

-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"

-};

-

-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,

- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device

- *  Descriptor.

- */

-USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =

-{

-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(19), .Type = DTYPE_String},

-		

-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA RNDIS CDC Demo"

-};

-

-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"

- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given

- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function

- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the

- *  USB host.

- */

-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)

-{

-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);

-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);

-

-	void*    Address = NULL;

-	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;

-

-	switch (DescriptorType)

-	{

-		case DTYPE_Device:

-			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;

-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);

-			break;

-		case DTYPE_Configuration: 

-			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;

-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);

-			break;

-		case DTYPE_String:

-			switch (DescriptorNumber)

-			{

-				case 0x00:

-					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;

-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);

-					break;

-				case 0x01:

-					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;

-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);

-					break;

-				case 0x02:

-					Address = (void*)&ProductString;

-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);

-					break;

-			}

-			

-			break;

-	}

-	

-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;

-	return Size;

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special 
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.  
+ */
+ 
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+		
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = 0x02,
+	.SubClass               = 0x00,
+	.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+		
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204C,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = 0x0000,
+		
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+		
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+				
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+				
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+			
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x02,
+			.SubClass               = 0x02,
+			.Protocol               = 0xFF,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x00,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x01, 0x10}
+		},
+		
+	.CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x02,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00}
+		},
+	
+	.CDC_Functional_Union = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)), .Type = 0x24},
+			.SubType                = 0x06,
+			
+			.Data                   = {0x00, 0x01}
+		},
+
+	.CDC_ManagementEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x02
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+			
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+				
+			.Class                  = 0x0A,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+				
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			 
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		},
+		
+	.RNDIS_DataInEndpoint = 
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+			
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x00
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(19), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+		
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA RNDIS CDC Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	void*    Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = (void*)&DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration: 
+			Address = (void*)&ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = (void*)&LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01:
+					Address = (void*)&ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02:
+					Address = (void*)&ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h
index 6a6577646..c84461c2e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.

- */

-

-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_

-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>

-		

-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */

-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         3

-

-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */

-		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   1	

-

-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */

-		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   2	

-

-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */

-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8

-

-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */

-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                64

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the

-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which

-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;

-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;

-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Header;

-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;

-			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;

-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;

-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;

-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint;

-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                RNDIS_DataInEndpoint;

-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;

-

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)

-											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-#endif

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
+		
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         3
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   1	
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   2	
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Header;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(1)             CDC_Functional_AbstractControlManagement;
+			CDC_FUNCTIONAL_DESCRIPTOR(2)             CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_ManagementEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                RNDIS_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, const uint8_t wIndex, void** const DescriptorAddress)
+											ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf
index f3e37be65..2cd90c3f6 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1564 +1,1564 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2

-

-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system

-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project

-#

-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored

-# The format is:

-#       TAG = value [value, ...]

-# For lists items can also be appended using:

-#       TAG += value [value, ...]

-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Project related configuration options

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file

-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all

-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the

-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See

-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.

-

-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8

-

-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded

-# by quotes) that should identify the project.

-

-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Demo"

-

-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.

-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or

-# if some version control system is used.

-

-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0

-

-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)

-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location

-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.

-

-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/

-

-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create

-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output

-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.

-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of

-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would

-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.

-

-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO

-

-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all

-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this

-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.

-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:

-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,

-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,

-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English

-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,

-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,

-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.

-

-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English

-

-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in

-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).

-# Set to NO to disable this.

-

-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES

-

-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend

-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.

-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the

-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.

-

-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES

-

-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator

-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string

-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be

-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is

-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.

-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically

-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"

-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"

-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"

-

-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \

-                         "The $name widget" \

-                         "The $name file" \

-                         is \

-                         provides \

-                         specifies \

-                         contains \

-                         represents \

-                         a \

-                         an \

-                         the

-

-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then

-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief

-# description.

-

-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO

-

-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all

-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those

-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment

-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.

-

-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO

-

-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full

-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set

-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.

-

-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES

-

-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag

-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is

-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of

-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.

-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the

-# path to strip.

-

-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =

-

-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of

-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells

-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.

-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class

-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that

-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.

-

-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =

-

-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter

-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems

-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.

-

-SHORT_NAMES            = YES

-

-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen

-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style

-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc

-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments

-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)

-

-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO

-

-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will

-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style

-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments

-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring

-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)

-

-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO

-

-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen

-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///

-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.

-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed

-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.

-

-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO

-

-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented

-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it

-# re-implements.

-

-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES

-

-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce

-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will

-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.

-

-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO

-

-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.

-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.

-

-TAB_SIZE               = 4

-

-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts

-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".

-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to

-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which

-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".

-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.

-

-ALIASES                =

-

-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C

-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.

-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list

-# of all members will be omitted, etc.

-

-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES

-

-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java

-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for

-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified

-# scopes will look different, etc.

-

-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO

-

-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran

-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for

-# Fortran.

-

-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO

-

-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL

-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for

-# VHDL.

-

-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO

-

-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.

-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.

-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.

-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of

-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,

-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat

-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),

-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.

-

-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =

-

-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want

-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should

-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and

-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.

-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration

-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.

-

-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO

-

-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to

-# enable parsing support.

-

-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO

-

-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.

-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public

-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.

-

-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO

-

-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter

-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)

-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the

-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or

-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the

-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.

-

-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES

-

-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC

-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first

-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default

-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.

-

-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO

-

-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of

-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a

-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to

-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using

-# the \nosubgrouping command.

-

-SUBGROUPING            = YES

-

-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum

-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So

-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct

-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,

-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically

-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound

-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.

-

-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO

-

-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to

-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.

-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.

-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is

-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause

-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time

-# causing a significant performance penality.

-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the

-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on

-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the

-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:

-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,

-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols

-

-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Build related configuration options

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in

-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.

-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless

-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES

-

-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES

-

-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class

-# will be included in the documentation.

-

-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES

-

-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file

-# will be included in the documentation.

-

-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES

-

-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)

-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.

-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.

-

-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES

-

-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local

-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in

-# the interface are included in the documentation.

-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.

-

-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO

-

-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be

-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called

-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base

-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default

-# anonymous namespace are hidden.

-

-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all

-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.

-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the

-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.

-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.

-

-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all

-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.

-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various

-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.

-

-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all

-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.

-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the

-# documentation.

-

-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any

-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.

-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the

-# function's detailed documentation block.

-

-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO

-

-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation

-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set

-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.

-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.

-

-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO

-

-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate

-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also

-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ

-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows

-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.

-

-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen

-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the

-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.

-

-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO

-

-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen

-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation

-# of that file.

-

-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES

-

-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen

-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation

-# rather than with sharp brackets.

-

-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO

-

-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]

-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.

-

-INLINE_INFO            = YES

-

-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen

-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members

-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in

-# declaration order.

-

-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES

-

-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the

-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically

-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in

-# declaration order.

-

-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO

-

-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.

-

-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO

-

-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the

-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)

-# the group names will appear in their defined order.

-

-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO

-

-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be

-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to

-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,

-# not including the namespace part.

-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.

-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the

-# alphabetical list.

-

-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO

-

-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or

-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo

-# commands in the documentation.

-

-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO

-

-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or

-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test

-# commands in the documentation.

-

-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO

-

-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or

-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug

-# commands in the documentation.

-

-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO

-

-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or

-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting

-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.

-

-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES

-

-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional

-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.

-

-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =

-

-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines

-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in

-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified

-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.

-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the

-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer

-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.

-

-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30

-

-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated

-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the

-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.

-

-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES

-

-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories

-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy

-# in the documentation. The default is NO.

-

-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES

-

-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.

-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the

-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.

-

-SHOW_FILES             = YES

-

-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the

-# Namespaces page.

-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index

-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.

-

-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES

-

-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that

-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from

-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via

-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of

-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file

-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output

-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.

-

-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =

-

-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by

-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files

-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents

-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a

-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name

-# of the layout file.

-

-LAYOUT_FILE            =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated

-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.

-

-QUIET                  = YES

-

-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are

-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank

-# NO is used.

-

-WARNINGS               = YES

-

-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings

-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will

-# automatically be disabled.

-

-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES

-

-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for

-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some

-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that

-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.

-

-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES

-

-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for

-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters

-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about

-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of

-# documentation.

-

-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES

-

-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that

-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text

-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the

-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain

-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could

-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)

-

-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"

-

-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning

-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written

-# to stderr.

-

-WARN_LOGFILE           =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the input files

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain

-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or

-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories

-# with spaces.

-

-INPUT                  = ./

-

-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files

-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is

-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built

-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for

-# the list of possible encodings.

-

-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8

-

-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the

-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp

-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left

-# blank the following patterns are tested:

-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx

-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90

-

-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \

-                         *.c \

-                         *.txt

-

-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories

-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.

-# If left blank NO is used.

-

-RECURSIVE              = YES

-

-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should

-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a

-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.

-

-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/

-

-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or

-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded

-# from the input.

-

-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO

-

-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the

-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude

-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched

-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories

-# for example use the pattern */test/*

-

-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 

-

-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names

-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the

-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the

-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,

-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test

-

-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \

-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*

-

-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or

-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see

-# the \include command).

-

-EXAMPLE_PATH           =

-

-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the

-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp

-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left

-# blank all files are included.

-

-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *

-

-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be

-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude

-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.

-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.

-

-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO

-

-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or

-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see

-# the \image command).

-

-IMAGE_PATH             =

-

-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should

-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program

-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>

-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an

-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes

-# to standard output.

-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be

-# ignored.

-

-INPUT_FILTER           =

-

-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern

-# basis.

-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the

-# filter if there is a match.

-# The filters are a list of the form:

-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further

-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER

-# is applied to all files.

-

-FILTER_PATTERNS        =

-

-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using

-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source

-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).

-

-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to source browsing

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will

-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.

-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also

-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.

-

-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO

-

-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body

-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.

-

-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO

-

-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct

-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code

-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.

-

-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES

-

-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES

-# then for each documented function all documented

-# functions referencing it will be listed.

-

-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO

-

-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES

-# then for each documented function all documented entities

-# called/used by that function will be listed.

-

-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO

-

-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)

-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from

-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will

-# link to the source code.

-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.

-

-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO

-

-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code

-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen

-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source

-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You

-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.

-

-USE_HTAGS              = NO

-

-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen

-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for

-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.

-

-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index

-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project

-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.

-

-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES

-

-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then

-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns

-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])

-

-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5

-

-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all

-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.

-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that

-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.

-

-IGNORE_PREFIX          =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the HTML output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate HTML output.

-

-GENERATE_HTML          = YES

-

-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.

-

-HTML_OUTPUT            = html

-

-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for

-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank

-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.

-

-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html

-

-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for

-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a

-# standard header.

-

-HTML_HEADER            =

-

-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for

-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a

-# standard footer.

-

-HTML_FOOTER            =

-

-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading

-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to

-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen

-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy

-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own

-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!

-

-HTML_STYLESHEET        =

-

-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML

-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting

-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.

-

-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO

-

-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,

-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to

-# NO a bullet list will be used.

-

-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES

-

-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML

-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the

-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports

-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox

-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).

-

-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES

-

-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files

-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3

-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).

-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the

-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that

-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in

-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find

-# it at startup.

-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.

-

-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO

-

-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the

-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple

-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)

-# can be grouped.

-

-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"

-

-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that

-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a

-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen

-# will append .docset to the name.

-

-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files

-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the

-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)

-# of the generated HTML documentation.

-

-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can

-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You

-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be

-# written to the html output directory.

-

-CHM_FILE               =

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can

-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of

-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run

-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.

-

-HHC_LOCATION           =

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag

-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that

-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).

-

-GENERATE_CHI           = NO

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING

-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file

-# content.

-

-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag

-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a

-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.

-

-BINARY_TOC             = NO

-

-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members

-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.

-

-TOC_EXPAND             = YES

-

-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER

-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for

-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated

-# HTML documentation.

-

-GENERATE_QHP           = NO

-

-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can

-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.

-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.

-

-QCH_FILE               =

-

-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating

-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see

-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace

-

-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project

-

-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating

-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see

-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders

-

-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc

-

-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.

-# For more information please see

-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters

-

-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =

-

-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see

-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.

-

-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =

-

-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's

-# filter section matches.

-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.

-

-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =

-

-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can

-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.

-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated

-# .qhp file.

-

-QHG_LOCATION           =

-

-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files

-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help

-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents

-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML

-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of

-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as

-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.

-

-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO

-

-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin

-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have

-# this name.

-

-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project

-

-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at

-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and

-# the value YES disables it.

-

-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO

-

-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])

-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.

-

-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1

-

-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index

-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.

-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated

-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that

-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports

-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).

-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.

-

-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES

-

-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,

-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.

-

-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO

-

-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be

-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree

-# is shown.

-

-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250

-

-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included

-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that

-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need

-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory

-# to force them to be regenerated.

-

-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10

-

-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript

-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should

-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine

-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.

-

-SEARCHENGINE           = NO

-

-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index

-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup

-# and does not have live searching capabilities.

-

-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate Latex output.

-

-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO

-

-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.

-

-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex

-

-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be

-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.

-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for

-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the

-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.

-

-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex

-

-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to

-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the

-# default command name.

-

-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex

-

-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact

-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to

-# save some trees in general.

-

-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO

-

-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used

-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and

-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.

-

-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide

-

-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX

-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.

-

-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =

-

-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for

-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until

-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a

-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!

-

-LATEX_HEADER           =

-

-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated

-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will

-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references

-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.

-

-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES

-

-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of

-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a

-# higher quality PDF documentation.

-

-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES

-

-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.

-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep

-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.

-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.

-

-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO

-

-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not

-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)

-# in the output.

-

-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO

-

-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.

-

-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the RTF output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output

-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with

-# other RTF readers or editors.

-

-GENERATE_RTF           = NO

-

-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.

-

-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf

-

-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact

-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to

-# save some trees in general.

-

-COMPACT_RTF            = NO

-

-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated

-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will

-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.

-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other

-# programs which support those fields.

-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.

-

-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO

-

-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's

-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide

-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.

-

-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =

-

-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.

-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.

-

-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the man page output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate man pages

-

-GENERATE_MAN           = NO

-

-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.

-

-MAN_OUTPUT             = man

-

-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to

-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)

-

-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3

-

-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,

-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity

-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files

-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command

-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.

-

-MAN_LINKS              = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the XML output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will

-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of

-# the code including all documentation.

-

-GENERATE_XML           = NO

-

-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.

-

-XML_OUTPUT             = xml

-

-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,

-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the

-# syntax of the XML files.

-

-XML_SCHEMA             =

-

-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,

-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the

-# syntax of the XML files.

-

-XML_DTD                =

-

-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will

-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting

-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that

-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.

-

-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will

-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file

-# that captures the structure of the code including all

-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental

-# and incomplete at the moment.

-

-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the Perl module output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will

-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of

-# the code including all documentation. Note that this

-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the

-# moment.

-

-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO

-

-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate

-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able

-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.

-

-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO

-

-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be

-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.

-# This is useful

-# if you want to understand what is going on.

-# On the other hand, if this

-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller

-# and Perl will parse it just the same.

-

-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES

-

-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file

-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.

-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same

-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.

-

-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include

-# files.

-

-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES

-

-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro

-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional

-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled

-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.

-

-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES

-

-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES

-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the

-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.

-

-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES

-

-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files

-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.

-

-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES

-

-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that

-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by

-# the preprocessor.

-

-INCLUDE_PATH           =

-

-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard

-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the

-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will

-# be used.

-

-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =

-

-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that

-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of

-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name

-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are

-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being

-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator

-# instead of the = operator.

-

-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__

-

-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then

-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.

-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.

-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.

-

-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG

-

-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then

-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone

-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such

-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse

-# the parser if not removed.

-

-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Configuration::additions related to external references

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.

-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation

-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without

-# this location is as follows:

-#

-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...

-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:

-#

-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...

-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or

-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool

-# does not have to be run to correct the links.

-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name

-# (where the name does NOT include the path)

-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen

-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.

-

-TAGFILES               =

-

-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create

-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.

-

-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =

-

-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed

-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes

-# will be listed.

-

-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO

-

-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed

-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will

-# be listed.

-

-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES

-

-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script

-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').

-

-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Configuration options related to the dot tool

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base

-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that

-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a

-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more

-# powerful graphs.

-

-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO

-

-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc

-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see

-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the

-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where

-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the

-# default search path.

-

-MSCGEN_PATH            =

-

-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide

-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented

-# or is not a class.

-

-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES

-

-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is

-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization

-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section

-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)

-

-HAVE_DOT               = NO

-

-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output

-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This

-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need

-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name

-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,

-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the

-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory

-# containing the font.

-

-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans

-

-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.

-# The default size is 10pt.

-

-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10

-

-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the

-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a

-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot

-# can find it using this tag.

-

-DOT_FONTPATH           =

-

-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen

-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and

-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the

-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.

-

-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO

-

-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen

-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and

-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and

-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.

-

-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO

-

-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen

-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies

-

-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO

-

-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and

-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling

-# Language.

-

-UML_LOOK               = NO

-

-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the

-# relations between templates and their instances.

-

-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO

-

-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT

-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented

-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with

-# other documented files.

-

-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO

-

-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and

-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each

-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or

-# indirectly include this file.

-

-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO

-

-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then

-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function

-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase

-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs

-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.

-

-CALL_GRAPH             = NO

-

-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then

-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function

-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase

-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller

-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.

-

-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO

-

-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen

-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.

-

-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO

-

-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES

-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories

-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include

-# relations between the files in the directories.

-

-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO

-

-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images

-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif

-# If left blank png will be used.

-

-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png

-

-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be

-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.

-

-DOT_PATH               =

-

-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that

-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the

-# \dotfile command).

-

-DOTFILE_DIRS           =

-

-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of

-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph

-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is

-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the

-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than

-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note

-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.

-

-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15

-

-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the

-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable

-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes

-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this

-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large

-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by

-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.

-

-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2

-

-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent

-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not

-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,

-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of

-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).

-

-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES

-

-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output

-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This

-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)

-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.

-

-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO

-

-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and

-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.

-

-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES

-

-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate

-# the various graphs.

-

-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES

+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - RNDIS Ethernet Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf
index a124afec1..47dbf236d 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/LUFA RNDIS.inf
@@ -1,52 +1,52 @@
-;     Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File

-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation

-

-[Version]

-Signature           = "$Windows NT$"

-Class               = Net

-ClassGUID           = {4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}

-Provider            = %COMPANY%

-DriverVer           = 06/21/2006,6.0.6000.16384

-;CatalogFile        = device.cat

-

-[Manufacturer]

-%COMPANY%         = RndisDevices,NTx86,NTamd64,NTia64

-

-; Decoration for x86 architecture

-[RndisDevices.NTx86]

-%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C

-

-; Decoration for x64 architecture

-[RndisDevices.NTamd64]

-%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C

-

-; Decoration for ia64 architecture

-[RndisDevices.NTia64]

-%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C

-

-;@@@ This is the common setting for setup

-[ControlFlags]

-ExcludeFromSelect=*

-

-; DDInstall section

-; References the in-build Netrndis.inf

-[RNDIS.NT.5.1]

-Characteristics = 0x84   ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI

-BusType         = 15

-; NEVER REMOVE THE FOLLOWING REFERENCE FOR NETRNDIS.INF

-include         = netrndis.inf

-needs           = Usb_Rndis.ndi

-AddReg          = Rndis_AddReg_Vista

-

-; DDInstal.Services section

-[RNDIS.NT.5.1.Services]

-include     = netrndis.inf

-needs       = Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services

-

-; No sys copyfiles - the sys files are already in-build 

-; (part of the operating system).

-

-; Modify these strings for your device as needed.

-[Strings] 

-COMPANY="LUFA Library"

+;     Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[Version]
+Signature           = "$Windows NT$"
+Class               = Net
+ClassGUID           = {4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}
+Provider            = %COMPANY%
+DriverVer           = 06/21/2006,6.0.6000.16384
+;CatalogFile        = device.cat
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%COMPANY%         = RndisDevices,NTx86,NTamd64,NTia64
+
+; Decoration for x86 architecture
+[RndisDevices.NTx86]
+%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+; Decoration for x64 architecture
+[RndisDevices.NTamd64]
+%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+; Decoration for ia64 architecture
+[RndisDevices.NTia64]
+%RNDISDEV%    = RNDIS.NT.5.1, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204C
+
+;@@@ This is the common setting for setup
+[ControlFlags]
+ExcludeFromSelect=*
+
+; DDInstall section
+; References the in-build Netrndis.inf
+[RNDIS.NT.5.1]
+Characteristics = 0x84   ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI
+BusType         = 15
+; NEVER REMOVE THE FOLLOWING REFERENCE FOR NETRNDIS.INF
+include         = netrndis.inf
+needs           = Usb_Rndis.ndi
+AddReg          = Rndis_AddReg_Vista
+
+; DDInstal.Services section
+[RNDIS.NT.5.1.Services]
+include     = netrndis.inf
+needs       = Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services
+
+; No sys copyfiles - the sys files are already in-build 
+; (part of the operating system).
+
+; Modify these strings for your device as needed.
+[Strings] 
+COMPANY="LUFA Library"
 RNDISDEV="LUFA USB RNDIS Demo"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c
index 53eaa57a9..6cbc67f89 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.c
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the

- *  conversion of physical MAC addresses to protocol IP addresses between the host and the

- *  device.

- */

- 

-#include "ARP.h"

-

-/** Processes an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response

- *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting the IP or MAC address of the

- *  virtual server device on the network.

- *

- *  \param[in] InDataStart   Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ARP header

- *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ARP header

- *

- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise

- */

-int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)

-{

-	DecodeARPHeader(InDataStart);

-

-	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderIN  = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;

-	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderOUT = (ARP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;

-

-	/* Ensure that the ARP request is a IPv4 request packet */

-	if ((SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4) &&

-	    (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->Operation) == ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST))

-	{

-		/* If the ARP packet is requesting the MAC or IP of the virtual webserver, return the response */

-		if (IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->TPA, &ServerIPAddress) || 

-		    MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->THA, &ServerMACAddress))

-		{

-			/* Fill out the ARP response header */

-			ARPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = ARPHeaderIN->HardwareType;

-			ARPHeaderOUT->ProtocolType = ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType;

-			ARPHeaderOUT->HLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->HLEN;

-			ARPHeaderOUT->PLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->PLEN;

-			ARPHeaderOUT->Operation    = SwapEndian_16(ARP_OPERATION_REPLY);

-

-			/* Copy over the sender MAC/IP to the target fields for the response */

-			ARPHeaderOUT->THA = ARPHeaderIN->SHA;

-			ARPHeaderOUT->TPA = ARPHeaderIN->SPA;

-

-			/* Copy over the new sender MAC/IP - MAC and IP addresses of the virtual webserver */

-			ARPHeaderOUT->SHA = ServerMACAddress;

-			ARPHeaderOUT->SPA = ServerIPAddress;

-

-			/* Return the size of the response so far */

-			return sizeof(ARP_Header_t);

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return NO_RESPONSE;

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the
+ *  conversion of physical MAC addresses to protocol IP addresses between the host and the
+ *  device.
+ */
+ 
+#include "ARP.h"
+
+/** Processes an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting the IP or MAC address of the
+ *  virtual server device on the network.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart   Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ARP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ARP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	DecodeARPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderIN  = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeaderOUT = (ARP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	/* Ensure that the ARP request is a IPv4 request packet */
+	if ((SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4) &&
+	    (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeaderIN->Operation) == ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST))
+	{
+		/* If the ARP packet is requesting the MAC or IP of the virtual webserver, return the response */
+		if (IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->TPA, &ServerIPAddress) || 
+		    MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeaderIN->THA, &ServerMACAddress))
+		{
+			/* Fill out the ARP response header */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->HardwareType = ARPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->ProtocolType = ARPHeaderIN->ProtocolType;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->HLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->HLEN;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->PLEN         = ARPHeaderIN->PLEN;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->Operation    = SwapEndian_16(ARP_OPERATION_REPLY);
+
+			/* Copy over the sender MAC/IP to the target fields for the response */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->THA = ARPHeaderIN->SHA;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->TPA = ARPHeaderIN->SPA;
+
+			/* Copy over the new sender MAC/IP - MAC and IP addresses of the virtual webserver */
+			ARPHeaderOUT->SHA = ServerMACAddress;
+			ARPHeaderOUT->SPA = ServerIPAddress;
+
+			/* Return the size of the response so far */
+			return sizeof(ARP_Header_t);
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h
index 93409babc..fce77969d 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ARP.h
@@ -1,74 +1,74 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for ARP.c.

- */

- 

-#ifndef _ARP_H_

-#define _ARP_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-		#include <string.h>

-		

-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"

-		#include "Ethernet.h"

-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"

-		

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a request from a host for an address translation */

-		#define ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST            1

-

-		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a reply from a host giving an address translation */

-		#define ARP_OPERATION_REPLY              2

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** Type define for an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint16_t      HardwareType; /**< Hardware type constant, indicating the hardware used */

-			uint16_t      ProtocolType; /**< Protocol being resolved, usually ETHERTYPE_IPV4 */

-			

-			uint8_t       HLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination hardware addresses */

-			uint8_t       PLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination protocol addresses */

-			uint16_t      Operation; /**< Type of operation, either ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST or ARP_OPERATION_REPLY */

-			

-			MAC_Address_t SHA; /**< Sender's hardware address */

-			IP_Address_t  SPA; /**< Sender's protocol address */

-			MAC_Address_t THA; /**< Target's hardware address */

-			IP_Address_t  TPA; /**< Target's protocol address */

-		} ARP_Header_t;

-		

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);

-

-#endif

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ARP.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _ARP_H_
+#define _ARP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a request from a host for an address translation */
+		#define ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST            1
+
+		/** ARP header operation constant, indicating a reply from a host giving an address translation */
+		#define ARP_OPERATION_REPLY              2
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an ARP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t      HardwareType; /**< Hardware type constant, indicating the hardware used */
+			uint16_t      ProtocolType; /**< Protocol being resolved, usually ETHERTYPE_IPV4 */
+			
+			uint8_t       HLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination hardware addresses */
+			uint8_t       PLEN; /**< Length in bytes of the source/destination protocol addresses */
+			uint16_t      Operation; /**< Type of operation, either ARP_OPERATION_REQUEST or ARP_OPERATION_REPLY */
+			
+			MAC_Address_t SHA; /**< Sender's hardware address */
+			IP_Address_t  SPA; /**< Sender's protocol address */
+			MAC_Address_t THA; /**< Target's hardware address */
+			IP_Address_t  TPA; /**< Target's protocol address */
+		} ARP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t ARP_ProcessARPPacket(void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c
index 085a50705..e6377af52 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.c
@@ -1,118 +1,118 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packet handling routines. This protocol

- *  handles the automatic IP negotiation to the host, so that the host will use the provided

- *  IP address given to it by the device.

- */

- 

-#include "DHCP.h"

-

-/** Processes a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response

- *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting or accepting an IP address.

- *

- *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header

- *  \param[in] DHCPHeaderInStart   Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's DHCP header

- *  \param[out] DHCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's DHCP header

- *

- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise

- */

-int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart)

-{

-	IP_Header_t*   IPHeaderIN    = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;

-	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderIN  = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderInStart;

-	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderOUT = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderOutStart;

-	

-	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsINStart  = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderInStart  + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));

-	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsOUTStart = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderOutStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));

-

-	DecodeDHCPHeader(DHCPHeaderInStart);

-

-	/* Zero out the response DHCP packet, as much of it legacy and left at 0 */

-	memset(DHCPHeaderOUT, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));

-

-	/* Fill out the response DHCP packet */

-	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareType          = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareType;

-	DHCPHeaderOUT->Operation             = DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY;

-	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareAddressLength = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareAddressLength;

-	DHCPHeaderOUT->Hops                  = 0;

-	DHCPHeaderOUT->TransactionID         = DHCPHeaderIN->TransactionID;

-	DHCPHeaderOUT->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;

-	DHCPHeaderOUT->Flags                 = DHCPHeaderIN->Flags;

-	DHCPHeaderOUT->YourIP                = ClientIPAddress;

-	memcpy(&DHCPHeaderOUT->ClientHardwareAddress, &DHCPHeaderIN->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));

-	DHCPHeaderOUT->Cookie                = SwapEndian_32(DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE);

-	

-	/* Alter the incoming IP packet header so that the corrected IP source and destinations are used - this means that

-	   when the response IP header is generated, it will use the corrected addresses and not the null/broatcast addresses */

-	IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress      = ClientIPAddress;

-	IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress = ServerIPAddress;

-

-	/* Process the incoming DHCP packet options */

-	while (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)

-	{	

-		/* Find the Message Type DHCP option, to determine the type of DHCP packet */

-		if (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)

-		{

-			if ((DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) || (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST))

-			{

-				/* Fill out the response DHCP packet options for a DHCP OFFER or ACK response */

-

-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE;

-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 1;

-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) ? DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER

-																								: DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK;

-

-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK;

-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 4;

-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;

-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;

-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;

-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0x00;

-

-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER;

-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = sizeof(IP_Address_t);

-				memcpy(DHCPOptionsOUTStart, &ServerIPAddress, sizeof(IP_Address_t));

-				DHCPOptionsOUTStart     += sizeof(IP_Address_t);

-

-				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_END;

-				

-				return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 12 + sizeof(IP_Address_t));

-			}

-		}

-		

-		/* Go to the next DHCP option - skip one byte if option is a padding byte, else skip the complete option's size */

-		DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2));

-	}

-	

-	return NO_RESPONSE;

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packet handling routines. This protocol
+ *  handles the automatic IP negotiation to the host, so that the host will use the provided
+ *  IP address given to it by the device.
+ */
+ 
+#include "DHCP.h"
+
+/** Processes a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is requesting or accepting an IP address.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] DHCPHeaderInStart   Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's DHCP header
+ *  \param[out] DHCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's DHCP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	IP_Header_t*   IPHeaderIN    = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
+	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderIN  = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderInStart;
+	DHCP_Header_t* DHCPHeaderOUT = (DHCP_Header_t*)DHCPHeaderOutStart;
+	
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsINStart  = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderInStart  + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptionsOUTStart = (uint8_t*)(DHCPHeaderOutStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	DecodeDHCPHeader(DHCPHeaderInStart);
+
+	/* Zero out the response DHCP packet, as much of it legacy and left at 0 */
+	memset(DHCPHeaderOUT, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	/* Fill out the response DHCP packet */
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareType          = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareType;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Operation             = DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->HardwareAddressLength = DHCPHeaderIN->HardwareAddressLength;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Hops                  = 0;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->TransactionID         = DHCPHeaderIN->TransactionID;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Flags                 = DHCPHeaderIN->Flags;
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->YourIP                = ClientIPAddress;
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeaderOUT->ClientHardwareAddress, &DHCPHeaderIN->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(MAC_Address_t));
+	DHCPHeaderOUT->Cookie                = SwapEndian_32(DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE);
+	
+	/* Alter the incoming IP packet header so that the corrected IP source and destinations are used - this means that
+	   when the response IP header is generated, it will use the corrected addresses and not the null/broatcast addresses */
+	IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress      = ClientIPAddress;
+	IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress = ServerIPAddress;
+
+	/* Process the incoming DHCP packet options */
+	while (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	{	
+		/* Find the Message Type DHCP option, to determine the type of DHCP packet */
+		if (DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
+		{
+			if ((DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) || (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST))
+			{
+				/* Fill out the response DHCP packet options for a DHCP OFFER or ACK response */
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 1;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = (DHCPOptionsINStart[2] == DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER) ? DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER
+																								: DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK;
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 4;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0xFF;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = 0x00;
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER;
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = sizeof(IP_Address_t);
+				memcpy(DHCPOptionsOUTStart, &ServerIPAddress, sizeof(IP_Address_t));
+				DHCPOptionsOUTStart     += sizeof(IP_Address_t);
+
+				*(DHCPOptionsOUTStart++) = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+				
+				return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 12 + sizeof(IP_Address_t));
+			}
+		}
+		
+		/* Go to the next DHCP option - skip one byte if option is a padding byte, else skip the complete option's size */
+		DHCPOptionsINStart += ((DHCPOptionsINStart[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptionsINStart[1] + 2));
+	}
+	
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h
index c4df5b3c7..cacdd8ffd 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/DHCP.h
@@ -1,125 +1,125 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for DHCP.c.

- */

- 

-#ifndef _DHCP_H_

-#define _DHCP_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-		#include <string.h>

-	

-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"

-		#include "Ethernet.h"

-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a request from a host to a DHCP server */

-		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST       0x01

-

-		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a reply from a DHCP server to a host */

-		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY         0x02

-		

-		/** Hardware type constant, indicating Ethernet as a carrier */

-		#define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET       0x01

-		

-		/** Magic boot protocol "cookie", inserted into all BOOTP packets (BOOTP is the carrier of DHCP) */

-		#define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE         0x63825363

-		

-		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that a subnet mask will follow */

-		#define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK    1

-

-		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the DHCP message type constant will follow */

-		#define DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE   53

-

-		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the IP address of the DHCP server will follow */

-		#define DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER    54

-

-		/** DHCP option list entry header, used to pad out option data */

-		#define DHCP_OPTION_PAD           0

-

-		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating the end of option data */

-		#define DHCP_OPTION_END           255

-			

-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server offer an IP address */

-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER 1

-

-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a DHCP server is offering an IP address */

-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER    2

-

-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server lease a given IP address */

-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST  3

-

-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, declining an offered DHCP server IP address lease */

-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE  4

-

-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, ACKing a host IP lease request */

-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK      5

-

-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, NACKing a host IP lease request */

-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_NACK     6

-

-		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a host is releasing a leased IP address */

-		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE  7

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t  Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */

-			uint8_t  HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */

-			uint8_t  HardwareAddressLength;  /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */

-			uint8_t  Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */

-

-			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */

-

-			uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */

-			uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */

-			

-			IP_Address_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */

-			IP_Address_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */

-			IP_Address_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */

-			IP_Address_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */

-			

-			uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */

-			uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */

-			uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */

-			

-			uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */

-		} DHCP_Header_t;

-

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart);

-

-#endif

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DHCP.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _DHCP_H_
+#define _DHCP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+	
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a request from a host to a DHCP server */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST       0x01
+
+		/** DHCP operation constant, indicating a reply from a DHCP server to a host */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY         0x02
+		
+		/** Hardware type constant, indicating Ethernet as a carrier */
+		#define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET       0x01
+		
+		/** Magic boot protocol "cookie", inserted into all BOOTP packets (BOOTP is the carrier of DHCP) */
+		#define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE         0x63825363
+		
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that a subnet mask will follow */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNETMASK    1
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the DHCP message type constant will follow */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE   53
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating that the IP address of the DHCP server will follow */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_DHCPSERVER    54
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, used to pad out option data */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_PAD           0
+
+		/** DHCP option list entry header, indicating the end of option data */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_END           255
+			
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server offer an IP address */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER 1
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a DHCP server is offering an IP address */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_OFFER    2
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, requesting that a DHCP server lease a given IP address */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST  3
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, declining an offered DHCP server IP address lease */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE  4
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, ACKing a host IP lease request */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_ACK      5
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, NACKing a host IP lease request */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_NACK     6
+
+		/** Message type constant, used in the DHCP option data field, indicating that a host is releasing a leased IP address */
+		#define DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE  7
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */
+			uint8_t  HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */
+			uint8_t  HardwareAddressLength;  /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */
+			uint8_t  Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */
+
+			uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */
+
+			uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */
+			uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */
+			
+			IP_Address_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */
+			IP_Address_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */
+			IP_Address_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			IP_Address_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			
+			uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */
+			uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			
+			uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */
+		} DHCP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderInStart, void* DHCPHeaderOutStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c
index d09930e4e..a3a42e22d 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.c
@@ -1,130 +1,130 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Ethernet frame packet handling routines. This protocol handles the processing of raw Ethernet

- *  frames sent and received, deferring the processing of subpacket protocols to the appropriate

- *  protocol handlers, such as DHCP or ARP.

- */

- 

-#include "Ethernet.h"

-

-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the virtual server MAC address. */

-const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress    = {SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS};

-

-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the virtual server IP address. */

-const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress     = {SERVER_IP_ADDRESS};

-

-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the broadcast MAC address. */

-const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress = {BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS};

-

-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a IP address to the broadcast IP address. */

-const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress  = {BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS};

-

-/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the client (host) IP address. */

-const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress     = {CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS};

-

-

-/** Processes an incoming Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response to the output Ethernet

- *  frame buffer if the sub protocol handlers create a valid response.

- */

-void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameOUT)

-{

-	DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(FrameIN);

-

-	/* Cast the incoming Ethernet frame to the Ethernet header type */

-	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameINHeader  = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameIN->FrameData;

-	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData;

-	

-	int16_t                  RetSize        = NO_RESPONSE;

-	

-	/* Ensure frame is addressed to either all (broadcast) or the virtual webserver, and is a type II frame */

-	if ((MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress) ||

-	     MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)) &&

-		 (SwapEndian_16(FrameIN->FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE))

-	{

-		/* Process the packet depending on its protocol */

-		switch (SwapEndian_16(FrameINHeader->EtherType))

-		{

-			case ETHERTYPE_ARP:

-				RetSize = ARP_ProcessARPPacket(&FrameIN->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],

-				                               &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);

-				break;		

-			case ETHERTYPE_IPV4:

-				RetSize = IP_ProcessIPPacket(FrameIN,

-				                             &FrameIN->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],

-				                             &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);

-				break;

-		}

-		

-		/* Protocol processing routine has filled a response, complete the ethernet frame header */

-		if (RetSize > 0)

-		{

-			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */

-			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;

-			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = FrameINHeader->Source;

-			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = FrameINHeader->EtherType;

-			

-			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */

-			FrameOUT->FrameLength           = (sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + RetSize);

-			FrameOUT->FrameInBuffer         = true;

-		}

-	}

-

-	/* Check if the packet was processed */

-	if (RetSize != NO_PROCESS)

-	{

-		/* Clear the frame buffer */

-		FrameIN->FrameInBuffer = false;

-	}

-}

-

-/** Calculates the appropriate ethernet checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's

- *  compliment of each word, complimented.

- *

- *  \param[in] Data   Pointer to the packet buffer data whose checksum must be calculated

- *  \param[in] Bytes  Number of bytes in the data buffer to process

- *

- *  \return A 16-bit Ethernet checksum value

- */

-uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes)

-{

-	uint16_t* Words    = (uint16_t*)Data;

-	uint32_t  Checksum = 0;

-

-	for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (Bytes >> 1); CurrWord++)

-	  Checksum += Words[CurrWord];

-	  

-	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)

-	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));

-	

-	return ~Checksum;

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Ethernet frame packet handling routines. This protocol handles the processing of raw Ethernet
+ *  frames sent and received, deferring the processing of subpacket protocols to the appropriate
+ *  protocol handlers, such as DHCP or ARP.
+ */
+ 
+#include "Ethernet.h"
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the virtual server MAC address. */
+const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress    = {SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the virtual server IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress     = {SERVER_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a MAC address to the broadcast MAC address. */
+const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress = {BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting a IP address to the broadcast IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress  = {BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+/** Constant for convenience when checking against or setting an IP address to the client (host) IP address. */
+const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress     = {CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS};
+
+
+/** Processes an incoming Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response to the output Ethernet
+ *  frame buffer if the sub protocol handlers create a valid response.
+ */
+void Ethernet_ProcessPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameOUT)
+{
+	DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(FrameIN);
+
+	/* Cast the incoming Ethernet frame to the Ethernet header type */
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameINHeader  = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameIN->FrameData;
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData;
+	
+	int16_t                  RetSize        = NO_RESPONSE;
+	
+	/* Ensure frame is addressed to either all (broadcast) or the virtual webserver, and is a type II frame */
+	if ((MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress) ||
+	     MAC_COMPARE(&FrameINHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)) &&
+		 (SwapEndian_16(FrameIN->FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE))
+	{
+		/* Process the packet depending on its protocol */
+		switch (SwapEndian_16(FrameINHeader->EtherType))
+		{
+			case ETHERTYPE_ARP:
+				RetSize = ARP_ProcessARPPacket(&FrameIN->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
+				                               &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
+				break;		
+			case ETHERTYPE_IPV4:
+				RetSize = IP_ProcessIPPacket(FrameIN,
+				                             &FrameIN->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)],
+				                             &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)]);
+				break;
+		}
+		
+		/* Protocol processing routine has filled a response, complete the ethernet frame header */
+		if (RetSize > 0)
+		{
+			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
+			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
+			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = FrameINHeader->Source;
+			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = FrameINHeader->EtherType;
+			
+			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
+			FrameOUT->FrameLength           = (sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) + RetSize);
+			FrameOUT->FrameInBuffer         = true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Check if the packet was processed */
+	if (RetSize != NO_PROCESS)
+	{
+		/* Clear the frame buffer */
+		FrameIN->FrameInBuffer = false;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Calculates the appropriate ethernet checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's
+ *  compliment of each word, complimented.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Data   Pointer to the packet buffer data whose checksum must be calculated
+ *  \param[in] Bytes  Number of bytes in the data buffer to process
+ *
+ *  \return A 16-bit Ethernet checksum value
+ */
+uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+	uint16_t* Words    = (uint16_t*)Data;
+	uint32_t  Checksum = 0;
+
+	for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (Bytes >> 1); CurrWord++)
+	  Checksum += Words[CurrWord];
+	  
+	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
+	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
+	
+	return ~Checksum;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h
index 5029b7f3e..d5e091c13 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Ethernet.h
@@ -1,107 +1,107 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for Ethernet.c.

- */

- 

-#ifndef _ETHERNET_H_

-#define _ETHERNET_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-		#include <string.h>

-		

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>

-

-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"

-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"

-		#include "ICMP.h"

-		#include "TCP.h"

-		#include "UDP.h"

-		#include "DHCP.h"

-		#include "ARP.h"

-		#include "IP.h"

-		

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** Physical MAC address of the USB RNDIS network adapter */

-		#define ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS              {0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}

-

-		/** Physical MAC address of the virtual server on the network */

-		#define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS               {0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01}		

-

-		/** Physical MAC address of the network broadcast address */

-		#define BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS            {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}

-	

-		/** Performs a comparison between two MAC addresses, indicating if they are identical.

-		 *  

-		 *  \param[in] MAC1  First MAC address

-		 *  \param[in] MAC2  Second MAC address

-		 *

-		 *  \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise

-		 */

-		#define MAC_COMPARE(MAC1, MAC2)          (memcmp(MAC1, MAC2, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)) == 0)

-		

-		/** Minimum size of an Ethernet packet in bytes, to conform to the Ethernet V2 packet standard */

-		#define ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE            0x0600

-

-		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that no response packet has been generated */

-		#define NO_RESPONSE                      0		

-

-		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that the packet has not yet been handled */

-		#define NO_PROCESS                       -1

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** Type define for an Ethernet frame header */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			MAC_Address_t Destination; /**< Physical MAC address of the packet recipient */

-			MAC_Address_t Source; /**< Physics MAC address of the packet source */

-			

-			union

-			{

-				uint16_t  EtherType; /**< Ethernet packet sub-protocol type, for Ethernet V2 packets */

-				uint16_t  Length; /**< Ethernet frame length, for Ethernet V1 packets */

-			};

-		} Ethernet_Frame_Header_t;

-		

-	/* External Variables: */

-		extern const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress;

-		extern const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress;

-		extern const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress;

-		extern const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress;

-		extern const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress;

-		

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		void     Ethernet_ProcessPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameOUT);

-		uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes);

-		

-#endif

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Ethernet.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _ETHERNET_H_
+#define _ETHERNET_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
+
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		#include "ICMP.h"
+		#include "TCP.h"
+		#include "UDP.h"
+		#include "DHCP.h"
+		#include "ARP.h"
+		#include "IP.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Physical MAC address of the USB RNDIS network adapter */
+		#define ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS              {0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}
+
+		/** Physical MAC address of the virtual server on the network */
+		#define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS               {0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01, 0x00, 0x01}		
+
+		/** Physical MAC address of the network broadcast address */
+		#define BROADCAST_MAC_ADDRESS            {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
+	
+		/** Performs a comparison between two MAC addresses, indicating if they are identical.
+		 *  
+		 *  \param[in] MAC1  First MAC address
+		 *  \param[in] MAC2  Second MAC address
+		 *
+		 *  \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define MAC_COMPARE(MAC1, MAC2)          (memcmp(MAC1, MAC2, sizeof(MAC_Address_t)) == 0)
+		
+		/** Minimum size of an Ethernet packet in bytes, to conform to the Ethernet V2 packet standard */
+		#define ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE            0x0600
+
+		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that no response packet has been generated */
+		#define NO_RESPONSE                      0		
+
+		/** Return value for all sub protocol handling routines, indicating that the packet has not yet been handled */
+		#define NO_PROCESS                       -1
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an Ethernet frame header */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			MAC_Address_t Destination; /**< Physical MAC address of the packet recipient */
+			MAC_Address_t Source; /**< Physics MAC address of the packet source */
+			
+			union
+			{
+				uint16_t  EtherType; /**< Ethernet packet sub-protocol type, for Ethernet V2 packets */
+				uint16_t  Length; /**< Ethernet frame length, for Ethernet V1 packets */
+			};
+		} Ethernet_Frame_Header_t;
+		
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern const MAC_Address_t ServerMACAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  ServerIPAddress;
+		extern const MAC_Address_t BroadcastMACAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  BroadcastIPAddress;
+		extern const IP_Address_t  ClientIPAddress;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void     Ethernet_ProcessPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameOUT);
+		uint16_t Ethernet_Checksum16(void* Data, uint16_t Bytes);
+		
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h
index 23f75108f..6117fe13e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/EthernetProtocols.h
@@ -1,81 +1,81 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  General Ethernet protocol constants and type defines, for use by

- *  all network protocol portions of the TCP/IP stack.

- */

-

-#ifndef _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_

-#define _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV4                   0x0800

-		#define ETHERTYPE_ARP                    0x0806

-		#define ETHERTYPE_RARP                   0x8035

-		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALK              0x809b

-		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALKARP           0x80f3

-		#define ETHERTYPE_IEEE8021Q              0x8100

-		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELLIPX              0x8137

-		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELL                 0x8138

-		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV6                   0x86DD

-		#define ETHERTYPE_COBRANET               0x8819

-		#define ETHERTYPE_PROVIDERBRIDGING       0x88a8

-		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSUNICAST            0x8847

-		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSMULTICAST          0x8848

-		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoEDISCOVERY         0x8863

-		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoESESSION           0x8864

-		#define ETHERTYPE_EAPOVERLAN             0x888E

-		#define ETHERTYPE_HYPERSCSI              0x889A

-		#define ETHERTYPE_ATAOVERETHERNET        0x88A2

-		#define ETHERTYPE_ETHERCAT               0x88A4

-		#define ETHERTYPE_SERCOSIII              0x88CD

-		#define ETHERTYPE_CESoE                  0x88D8

-		#define ETHERTYPE_MACSECURITY            0x88E5

-		#define ETHERTYPE_FIBRECHANNEL           0x8906

-		#define ETHERTYPE_QINQ                   0x9100

-		#define ETHERTYPE_VLLT                   0xCAFE

-		

-		#define PROTOCOL_ICMP                    1

-		#define PROTOCOL_IGMP                    2

-		#define PROTOCOL_TCP                     6

-		#define PROTOCOL_UDP                     17

-		#define PROTOCOL_OSPF                    89

-		#define PROTOCOL_SCTP                    132

-

-	/* Type Defines: */		

-		/** Type define for a protocol IP address of a device on a network */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t       Octets[4]; /**< Individual bytes of an IP address */

-		} IP_Address_t;

-

-#endif

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  General Ethernet protocol constants and type defines, for use by
+ *  all network protocol portions of the TCP/IP stack.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
+#define _ETHERNET_PROTOCOLS_H_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV4                   0x0800
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ARP                    0x0806
+		#define ETHERTYPE_RARP                   0x8035
+		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALK              0x809b
+		#define ETHERTYPE_APPLETALKARP           0x80f3
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IEEE8021Q              0x8100
+		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELLIPX              0x8137
+		#define ETHERTYPE_NOVELL                 0x8138
+		#define ETHERTYPE_IPV6                   0x86DD
+		#define ETHERTYPE_COBRANET               0x8819
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PROVIDERBRIDGING       0x88a8
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSUNICAST            0x8847
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MPLSMULTICAST          0x8848
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoEDISCOVERY         0x8863
+		#define ETHERTYPE_PPPoESESSION           0x8864
+		#define ETHERTYPE_EAPOVERLAN             0x888E
+		#define ETHERTYPE_HYPERSCSI              0x889A
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ATAOVERETHERNET        0x88A2
+		#define ETHERTYPE_ETHERCAT               0x88A4
+		#define ETHERTYPE_SERCOSIII              0x88CD
+		#define ETHERTYPE_CESoE                  0x88D8
+		#define ETHERTYPE_MACSECURITY            0x88E5
+		#define ETHERTYPE_FIBRECHANNEL           0x8906
+		#define ETHERTYPE_QINQ                   0x9100
+		#define ETHERTYPE_VLLT                   0xCAFE
+		
+		#define PROTOCOL_ICMP                    1
+		#define PROTOCOL_IGMP                    2
+		#define PROTOCOL_TCP                     6
+		#define PROTOCOL_UDP                     17
+		#define PROTOCOL_OSPF                    89
+		#define PROTOCOL_SCTP                    132
+
+	/* Type Defines: */		
+		/** Type define for a protocol IP address of a device on a network */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       Octets[4]; /**< Individual bytes of an IP address */
+		} IP_Address_t;
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c
index dd339ca3a..2d8183746 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.c
@@ -1,80 +1,80 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles

- *  Echo requests from the host, to indicate a successful network connection between the host

- *  and the virtual server.

- */

- 

-#include "ICMP.h"

-

-/** Processes an ICMP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response

- *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is issuing a ICMP ECHO request.

- *

- *  \param[in] FrameIN        Pointer to the incoming Ethernet frame information structure

- *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ICMP header

- *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ICMP header

- *

- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise

- */

-int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)

-{

-	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderIN  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;

-	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderOUT = (ICMP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;

-

-	DecodeICMPHeader(InDataStart);

-

-	/* Determine if the ICMP packet is an echo request (ping) */

-	if (ICMPHeaderIN->Type == ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST)

-	{

-		/* Fill out the ICMP response packet */

-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Type     = ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY;

-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Code     = 0;

-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0;

-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Id       = ICMPHeaderIN->Id;

-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Sequence = ICMPHeaderIN->Sequence;

-		

-		uint16_t DataSize = FrameIN->FrameLength - ((((uint16_t)InDataStart + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)) - (uint16_t)FrameIN->FrameData));

-		

-		/* Copy the remaining payload to the response - echo requests should echo back any sent data */

-		memcpy(&((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],

-		       &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],

-			   DataSize);

-

-		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(ICMPHeaderOUT, (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)));

-

-		/* Return the size of the response so far */

-		return (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t));

-	}

-	

-	return NO_RESPONSE;

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles
+ *  Echo requests from the host, to indicate a successful network connection between the host
+ *  and the virtual server.
+ */
+ 
+#include "ICMP.h"
+
+/** Processes an ICMP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if the host is issuing a ICMP ECHO request.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] FrameIN        Pointer to the incoming Ethernet frame information structure
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's ICMP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's ICMP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderIN  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeaderOUT = (ICMP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	DecodeICMPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	/* Determine if the ICMP packet is an echo request (ping) */
+	if (ICMPHeaderIN->Type == ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the ICMP response packet */
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Type     = ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Code     = 0;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = 0;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Id       = ICMPHeaderIN->Id;
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Sequence = ICMPHeaderIN->Sequence;
+		
+		uint16_t DataSize = FrameIN->FrameLength - ((((uint16_t)InDataStart + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)) - (uint16_t)FrameIN->FrameData));
+		
+		/* Copy the remaining payload to the response - echo requests should echo back any sent data */
+		memcpy(&((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
+		       &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)],
+			   DataSize);
+
+		ICMPHeaderOUT->Checksum = Ethernet_Checksum16(ICMPHeaderOUT, (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t)));
+
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (DataSize + sizeof(ICMP_Header_t));
+	}
+	
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h
index e630c1afc..6c2fbb134 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ICMP.h
@@ -1,80 +1,80 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for ICMP.c.

- */

-

-#ifndef _ICMP_H_

-#define _ICMP_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-		#include <string.h>

-		

-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"

-		#include "Ethernet.h"

-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"

-	

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Reply message */

-		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY              0

-

-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating a packet destination is unreachable */

-		#define ICMP_TYPE_DESTINATIONUNREACHABLE 3

-		

-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Source Quench message */

-		#define ICMP_TYPE_SOURCEQUENCH           4

-

-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Redirect message */

-		#define ICMP_TYPE_REDIRECTMESSAGE        5

-

-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Request message */

-		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST            8

-

-		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Time Exceeded message */

-		#define ICMP_TYPE_TIMEEXCEEDED           11

-	

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** Type define for an ICMP message header. */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint8_t       Type; /**< ICMP message type, a ICMP_TYPE_* constant */

-			uint8_t       Code; /**< ICMP message code, indicating the message value */

-			uint16_t      Checksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the ICMP message */

-			uint16_t      Id; /**< Id of the ICMP message */

-			uint16_t      Sequence; /**< Sequence number of the ICMP message, to link together message responses */

-		} ICMP_Header_t;

-		

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);

-

-#endif

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ICMP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ICMP_H_
+#define _ICMP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Reply message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREPLY              0
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating a packet destination is unreachable */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_DESTINATIONUNREACHABLE 3
+		
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Source Quench message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_SOURCEQUENCH           4
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Redirect message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_REDIRECTMESSAGE        5
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP ECHO Request message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_ECHOREQUEST            8
+
+		/** ICMP message type constant, indicating an ICMP Time Exceeded message */
+		#define ICMP_TYPE_TIMEEXCEEDED           11
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for an ICMP message header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t       Type; /**< ICMP message type, a ICMP_TYPE_* constant */
+			uint8_t       Code; /**< ICMP message code, indicating the message value */
+			uint16_t      Checksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the ICMP message */
+			uint16_t      Id; /**< Id of the ICMP message */
+			uint16_t      Sequence; /**< Sequence number of the ICMP message, to link together message responses */
+		} ICMP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c
index 000d89001..6766322ca 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.c
@@ -1,113 +1,113 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Internet Protocol (IP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles IP packets from the

- *  host which typically encapsulate other protocols such as ICMP, UDP and TCP.

- */

- 

-#include "IP.h"

-

-/** Processes an IP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response

- *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a sub-protocol handler.

- *

- *  \param[in] FrameIN        Pointer to the incoming Ethernet frame information structure

- *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header

- *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's IP header

- *

- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no

- *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the

- *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration

- */

-int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)

-{

-	DecodeIPHeader(InDataStart);

-

-	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;

-	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;

-

-	/* Header length is specified in number of longs in the packet header, convert to bytes */

-	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));

-

-	int16_t  RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;

-

-	/* Check to ensure the IP packet is addressed to the virtual webserver's IP or the broadcast IP address */

-	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)) &&

-	    !(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &BroadcastIPAddress)))

-	{

-		return NO_RESPONSE;

-	}

-	

-	/* Pass off the IP payload to the appropriate protocol processing routine */

-	switch (IPHeaderIN->Protocol)

-	{

-		case PROTOCOL_ICMP:

-			RetSize = ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(FrameIN,

-			                                 &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],

-			                                 &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);

-			break;

-		case PROTOCOL_TCP:

-			RetSize = TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(InDataStart,

-			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],

-			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);		

-			break;

-		case PROTOCOL_UDP:

-			RetSize = UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(InDataStart,

-			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],

-			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);		

-			break;

-	}

-	

-	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */

-	if (RetSize > 0)

-	{

-		/* Fill out the response IP packet header */

-		IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);

-		IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;

-		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));

-		IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;

-		IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;

-		IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;

-		IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;

-		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;

-		IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = IPHeaderIN->Protocol;

-		IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;

-		IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress;

-		IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress;

-		

-		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));

-						

-		/* Return the size of the response so far */

-		return (sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);

-	}

-	

-	return RetSize;

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Internet Protocol (IP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles IP packets from the
+ *  host which typically encapsulate other protocols such as ICMP, UDP and TCP.
+ */
+ 
+#include "IP.h"
+
+/** Processes an IP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a sub-protocol handler.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] FrameIN        Pointer to the incoming Ethernet frame information structure
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[out] OutDataStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's IP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
+ *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
+ *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
+ */
+int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart)
+{
+	DecodeIPHeader(InDataStart);
+
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderIN  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeaderOUT = (IP_Header_t*)OutDataStart;
+
+	/* Header length is specified in number of longs in the packet header, convert to bytes */
+	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	int16_t  RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
+
+	/* Check to ensure the IP packet is addressed to the virtual webserver's IP or the broadcast IP address */
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
+	    !(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress, &BroadcastIPAddress)))
+	{
+		return NO_RESPONSE;
+	}
+	
+	/* Pass off the IP payload to the appropriate protocol processing routine */
+	switch (IPHeaderIN->Protocol)
+	{
+		case PROTOCOL_ICMP:
+			RetSize = ICMP_ProcessICMPPacket(FrameIN,
+			                                 &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                                 &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+		case PROTOCOL_TCP:
+			RetSize = TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(InDataStart,
+			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);		
+			break;
+		case PROTOCOL_UDP:
+			RetSize = UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(InDataStart,
+			                               &((uint8_t*)InDataStart)[HeaderLengthBytes],
+			                               &((uint8_t*)OutDataStart)[sizeof(IP_Header_t)]);		
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
+	if (RetSize > 0)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the response IP packet header */
+		IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+		IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+		IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
+		IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = IPHeaderIN->Protocol;
+		IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
+		IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress;
+		IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress;
+		
+		IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
+						
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (sizeof(IP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+	}
+	
+	return RetSize;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h
index 60d43e14d..82f28e80e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/IP.h
@@ -1,93 +1,93 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for IP.c.

- */

- 

-#ifndef _IP_H_

-#define _IP_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-		#include <string.h>

-		

-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"

-		#include "Ethernet.h"

-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"

-	

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** Protocol IP address of the host (client) machine, once assigned by DHCP */

-		#define CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    1}

-

-		/** Protocol IP address of the virtual server machine */

-		#define SERVER_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    2}

-

-		/** Protocol IP address of the broadcast address */

-		#define BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS             {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}

-

-		/** Default Time To Live (TTL) value for sent packets, indicating the maximum allowable hops until their destination is reached */

-		#define DEFAULT_TTL                      128

-		

-		/** Performs a comparison between two IP addresses, indicating if they are identical.

-		 *  

-		 *  \param[in] IP1  First IP address

-		 *  \param[in] IP2  Second IP address

-		 *

-		 *  \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise

-		 */

-		#define IP_COMPARE(IP1, IP2)             (memcmp(IP1, IP2, sizeof(IP_Address_t)) == 0)

-		

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** Type define of an IP packet header. */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			unsigned char  HeaderLength   : 4; /**< Total length of the packet header, in 4-byte blocks */

-			unsigned char  Version        : 4; /**< IP protocol version */

-			uint8_t        TypeOfService; /**< Special service type identifier, indicating delay/throughput/reliability levels */

-			uint16_t       TotalLength; /**< Total length of the IP packet, in bytes */

-

-			uint16_t       Identification; /**< Identification value for identifying fragmented packets */

-			unsigned int   FragmentOffset : 13; /**< Offset of this IP fragment */

-			unsigned int   Flags          : 3; /**< Fragment flags, to indicate if a packet is fragmented */

-

-			uint8_t        TTL; /**< Maximum allowable number of hops to reach the packet destination */

-			uint8_t        Protocol; /**< Encapsulated protocol type */

-			uint16_t       HeaderChecksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the IP header */

-			

-			IP_Address_t  SourceAddress; /**< Source protocol IP address of the packet */

-			IP_Address_t  DestinationAddress; /**< Destination protocol IP address of the packet */

-		} IP_Header_t;

-		

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);

-

-#endif

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for IP.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _IP_H_
+#define _IP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Protocol IP address of the host (client) machine, once assigned by DHCP */
+		#define CLIENT_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    1}
+
+		/** Protocol IP address of the virtual server machine */
+		#define SERVER_IP_ADDRESS                { 10,     0,    0,    2}
+
+		/** Protocol IP address of the broadcast address */
+		#define BROADCAST_IP_ADDRESS             {0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF}
+
+		/** Default Time To Live (TTL) value for sent packets, indicating the maximum allowable hops until their destination is reached */
+		#define DEFAULT_TTL                      128
+		
+		/** Performs a comparison between two IP addresses, indicating if they are identical.
+		 *  
+		 *  \param[in] IP1  First IP address
+		 *  \param[in] IP2  Second IP address
+		 *
+		 *  \return True if the addresses match, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define IP_COMPARE(IP1, IP2)             (memcmp(IP1, IP2, sizeof(IP_Address_t)) == 0)
+		
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define of an IP packet header. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned char  HeaderLength   : 4; /**< Total length of the packet header, in 4-byte blocks */
+			unsigned char  Version        : 4; /**< IP protocol version */
+			uint8_t        TypeOfService; /**< Special service type identifier, indicating delay/throughput/reliability levels */
+			uint16_t       TotalLength; /**< Total length of the IP packet, in bytes */
+
+			uint16_t       Identification; /**< Identification value for identifying fragmented packets */
+			unsigned int   FragmentOffset : 13; /**< Offset of this IP fragment */
+			unsigned int   Flags          : 3; /**< Fragment flags, to indicate if a packet is fragmented */
+
+			uint8_t        TTL; /**< Maximum allowable number of hops to reach the packet destination */
+			uint8_t        Protocol; /**< Encapsulated protocol type */
+			uint16_t       HeaderChecksum; /**< Ethernet checksum of the IP header */
+			
+			IP_Address_t  SourceAddress; /**< Source protocol IP address of the packet */
+			IP_Address_t  DestinationAddress; /**< Destination protocol IP address of the packet */
+		} IP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t IP_ProcessIPPacket(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameIN, void* InDataStart, void* OutDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c
index 37cb840fd..e0bf6ecfe 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c
@@ -1,280 +1,280 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/* Protocol decoders for Ethernet, TCP, IP, ICMP and ARP. Each of these routines

-   accepts a header to the appropriate protocol and prints out pertinent information

-   on the packet through the serial port.

-   

-   To disable printing of a specific protocol, define the token NO_DECODE_{Protocol}

-   in the project makefile, and pass it to the compiler using the -D switch.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Protocol decoding routines, for the plain-text decoding of Ethernet frames for debugging purposes.

- *  Enabled protocol decoders will print incoming Ethernet frame contents through the USART in a human

- *  readable format.

- *

- *  Note that the USART is a slow transmission medium, and will slow down packet processing considerably.

- *  Packet decoding routines can be disabled by defining NO_DECODE_{Protocol Name} in the project makefile

- *  and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.

- */

- 

-#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"

-

-/** Decodes an Ethernet frame header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.

- *

- *  \param[in] FrameINData  Pointer to the start of an Ethernet frame information structure

- */

-void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameINData)

-{

-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ETHERNET)

-	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)FrameINData->FrameData;

-	

-	printf_P(PSTR("\r\n"));

-	

-	printf_P(PSTR("  ETHERNET\r\n"));

-	printf_P(PSTR("  + Frame Size: %u\r\n"), FrameINData->FrameLength);

-

-	if (!(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress)) &&

-	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)))

-	{

-		printf_P(PSTR("  + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));

-		return;

-	}

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Source : %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Source.Octets[0],

-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[1],

-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[2],

-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[3],

-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[4],

-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[5]);

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Dest: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"),    FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[0],

-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[1],

-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[2],

-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[3],

-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[4],

-	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[5]);

-

-	if (SwapEndian_16(FrameINData->FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE)

-	  printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: 0x%04x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(FrameHeader->EtherType));

-	else

-	  printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: UNKNOWN E1\r\n"));

-	#endif

-}

-

-/** Decodes an ARP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.

- *

- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ARP packet header

- */

-void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart)

-{

-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ARP)

-	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeader = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;	

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    ARP\r\n"));

-

-	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->TPA, &ServerIPAddress)) &&

-	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->THA, &ServerMACAddress)))

-	{

-		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));

-		return;		

-	}

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType));

-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Operation: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->Operation));

-	

-	if (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4)

-	{

-		printf_P(PSTR("    + SHA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[0],

-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[1],

-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[2],

-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[3],

-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[4],

-		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[5]);

-

-		printf_P(PSTR("    + SPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[0],

-		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[1],

-		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[2],

-		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[3]);

-

-		printf_P(PSTR("    + THA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->THA.Octets[0],

-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[1],

-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[2],

-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[3],

-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[4],

-		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[5]);

-

-		printf_P(PSTR("    + TPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[0],

-		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[1],

-		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[2],

-		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[3]);

-	}

-	#endif

-}

-

-/** Decodes an IP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.

- *

- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an IP packet header

- */

-void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart)

-{

-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_IP)

-	IP_Header_t* IPHeader  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;

-

-	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeader->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    IP\r\n"));

-

-	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeader->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)))

-	{

-		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));

-		return;

-	}

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);

-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Packet Version: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Version);

-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Total Length: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(IPHeader->TotalLength));

-	

-	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Protocol);

-	printf_P(PSTR("    + TTL: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->TTL);

-	

-	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Src: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[0],

-	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[1],

-	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[2],

-	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[3]);	

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Dst: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[0],

-	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[1],

-	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[2],

-	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[3]);

-	#endif

-}

-

-/** Decodes an ICMP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.

- *

- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ICMP packet header

- */

-void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart)

-{

-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ICMP)

-	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeader  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     ICMP\r\n"));

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Type: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Type);

-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Code: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Code);

-	#endif

-}

-

-/** Decodes a TCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.

- *

- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a TCP packet header

- */

-void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart)

-{

-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_TCP)

-	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeader  = (TCP_Header_t*)InDataStart;

-

-	uint16_t               HeaderLengthBytes = (TCPHeader->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     TCP\r\n"));

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->SourcePort));

-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->DestinationPort));

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Sequence Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->SequenceNumber));

-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Acknowledgment Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->AcknowledgmentNumber));

-	

-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Flags: 0x%02X\r\n"), TCPHeader->Flags);

-	

-	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeader->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Closed)

-	  printf_P(PSTR("     + NOT LISTENING ON DESTINATION PORT\r\n"));

-	#endif

-}

-

-/** Decodes an UDP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.

- *

- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a UDP packet header

- */

-void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart)

-{

-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_UDP)

-	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeader = (UDP_Header_t*)InDataStart;

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     UDP\r\n"));

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->SourcePort));

-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->DestinationPort));

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("     + Data Length: %d\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->Length));

-	#endif

-}

-

-/** Decodes an DHCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.

- *

- *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a DHCP packet header

- */

-void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart)

-{

-	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_DHCP)

-	uint8_t* DHCPOptions = (InDataStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));

-

-	printf_P(PSTR("     \\\r\n      DHCP\r\n"));

-

-	while (DHCPOptions[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)

-	{

-		if (DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)

-		{

-			switch (DHCPOptions[2])

-			{

-				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER:

-					printf_P(PSTR("      + DISCOVER\r\n"));

-					break;

-				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST:

-					printf_P(PSTR("      + REQUEST\r\n"));

-					break;

-				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE:

-					printf_P(PSTR("      + RELEASE\r\n"));

-					break;

-				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE:

-					printf_P(PSTR("      + DECLINE\r\n"));

-					break;

-			}

-		}

-		

-		DHCPOptions += ((DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptions[1] + 2));

-	}

-

-	#endif

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/* Protocol decoders for Ethernet, TCP, IP, ICMP and ARP. Each of these routines
+   accepts a header to the appropriate protocol and prints out pertinent information
+   on the packet through the serial port.
+   
+   To disable printing of a specific protocol, define the token NO_DECODE_{Protocol}
+   in the project makefile, and pass it to the compiler using the -D switch.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Protocol decoding routines, for the plain-text decoding of Ethernet frames for debugging purposes.
+ *  Enabled protocol decoders will print incoming Ethernet frame contents through the USART in a human
+ *  readable format.
+ *
+ *  Note that the USART is a slow transmission medium, and will slow down packet processing considerably.
+ *  Packet decoding routines can be disabled by defining NO_DECODE_{Protocol Name} in the project makefile
+ *  and passing it to the compiler via the -D switch.
+ */
+ 
+#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+
+/** Decodes an Ethernet frame header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] FrameINData  Pointer to the start of an Ethernet frame information structure
+ */
+void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameINData)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ETHERNET)
+	Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)FrameINData->FrameData;
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("  ETHERNET\r\n"));
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + Frame Size: %u\r\n"), FrameINData->FrameLength);
+
+	if (!(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &ServerMACAddress)) &&
+	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&FrameHeader->Destination, &BroadcastMACAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("  + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Source : %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), FrameHeader->Source.Octets[0],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[1],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[2],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[3],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[4],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Source.Octets[5]);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("  + MAC Dest: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"),    FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[0],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[1],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[2],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[3],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[4],
+	                                                                     FrameHeader->Destination.Octets[5]);
+
+	if (SwapEndian_16(FrameINData->FrameLength) > ETHERNET_VER2_MINSIZE)
+	  printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: 0x%04x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(FrameHeader->EtherType));
+	else
+	  printf_P(PSTR("  + Protocol: UNKNOWN E1\r\n"));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an ARP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ARP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ARP)
+	ARP_Header_t* ARPHeader = (ARP_Header_t*)InDataStart;	
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    ARP\r\n"));
+
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->TPA, &ServerIPAddress)) &&
+	    !(MAC_COMPARE(&ARPHeader->THA, &ServerMACAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;		
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %x\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType));
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Operation: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->Operation));
+	
+	if (SwapEndian_16(ARPHeader->ProtocolType) == ETHERTYPE_IPV4)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + SHA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[0],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[1],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[2],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[3],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[4],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->SHA.Octets[5]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + SPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[0],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[1],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[2],
+		                                                ARPHeader->SPA.Octets[3]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + THA MAC: %02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X:%02X\r\n"), ARPHeader->THA.Octets[0],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[1],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[2],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[3],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[4],
+		                                                                   ARPHeader->THA.Octets[5]);
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + TPA IP: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[0],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[1],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[2],
+		                                                ARPHeader->TPA.Octets[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an IP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an IP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_IP)
+	IP_Header_t* IPHeader  = (IP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	uint16_t HeaderLengthBytes = (IPHeader->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("   \\\r\n    IP\r\n"));
+
+	if (!(IP_COMPARE(&IPHeader->DestinationAddress, &ServerIPAddress)))
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("    + NOT ADDRESSED TO DEVICE\r\n"));
+		return;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Packet Version: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Version);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Total Length: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(IPHeader->TotalLength));
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + Protocol: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->Protocol);
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + TTL: %u\r\n"), IPHeader->TTL);
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Src: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[0],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[1],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[2],
+	                                                IPHeader->SourceAddress.Octets[3]);	
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    + IP Dst: %u.%u.%u.%u\r\n"), IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[0],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[1],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[2],
+	                                                IPHeader->DestinationAddress.Octets[3]);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an ICMP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of an ICMP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_ICMP)
+	ICMP_Header_t* ICMPHeader  = (ICMP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     ICMP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Type: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Type);
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Code: %u\r\n"), ICMPHeader->Code);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes a TCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a TCP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_TCP)
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeader  = (TCP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	uint16_t               HeaderLengthBytes = (TCPHeader->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     TCP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Header Length: %u Bytes\r\n"), HeaderLengthBytes);
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->SourcePort));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(TCPHeader->DestinationPort));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Sequence Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->SequenceNumber));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Acknowledgment Number: %lu\r\n"), SwapEndian_32(TCPHeader->AcknowledgmentNumber));
+	
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Flags: 0x%02X\r\n"), TCPHeader->Flags);
+	
+	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeader->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Closed)
+	  printf_P(PSTR("     + NOT LISTENING ON DESTINATION PORT\r\n"));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an UDP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a UDP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_UDP)
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeader = (UDP_Header_t*)InDataStart;
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("    \\\r\n     UDP\r\n"));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Source Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->SourcePort));
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Destination Port: %u\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->DestinationPort));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     + Data Length: %d\r\n"), SwapEndian_16(UDPHeader->Length));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Decodes an DHCP header and prints its contents to through the USART in a human readable format.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] InDataStart  Pointer to the start of a DHCP packet header
+ */
+void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart)
+{
+	#if !defined(NO_DECODE_DHCP)
+	uint8_t* DHCPOptions = (InDataStart + sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("     \\\r\n      DHCP\r\n"));
+
+	while (DHCPOptions[0] != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	{
+		if (DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_MESSAGETYPE)
+		{
+			switch (DHCPOptions[2])
+			{
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DISCOVER:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + DISCOVER\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_REQUEST:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + REQUEST\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_RELEASE:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + RELEASE\r\n"));
+					break;
+				case DHCP_MESSAGETYPE_DECLINE:
+					printf_P(PSTR("      + DECLINE\r\n"));
+					break;
+			}
+		}
+		
+		DHCPOptions += ((DHCPOptions[0] == DHCP_OPTION_PAD) ? 1 : (DHCPOptions[1] + 2));
+	}
+
+	#endif
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h
index 2dfc60868..56ed795e6 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/ProtocolDecoders.h
@@ -1,59 +1,59 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for ProtocolDecoders.c.

- */

-

-#ifndef _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_

-#define _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>

-		#include <stdio.h>

-		

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>

-		

-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"

-		#include "Ethernet.h"

-		

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameINData);

-		void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart);

-		void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart);

-		void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart);

-		void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart);

-		void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart);

-		void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart);

-

-#endif

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ProtocolDecoders.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
+#define _PROTOCOL_DECODERS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DecodeEthernetFrameHeader(Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameINData);
+		void DecodeARPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeIPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeICMPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeTCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeUDPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+		void DecodeDHCPHeader(void* InDataStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c
index 6500f3ba0..318085f59 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.c
@@ -1,621 +1,621 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the reliable in-order transmission

- *  and reception of packets to and from devices on a network, to "ports" on the device. It is used in situations where data

- *  delivery must be reliable and correct, e.g. HTTP, TELNET and most other non-streaming protocols.

- */

- 

-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C

-#include "TCP.h"

-

-/** Port state table array. This contains the current status of TCP ports in the device. To save on space, only open ports are

- *  stored - closed ports may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any ports not present in the array are closed. This

- *  allows for MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS to be less than the number of ports used by the application if desired.

- */

-TCP_PortState_t        PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];

-

-/** Connection state table array. This contains the current status of TCP connections in the device. To save on space, only active

- *  (non-closed) connections are stored - closed connections may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any connections

- *  not present in the array are closed.

- */

-TCP_ConnectionState_t  ConnectionStateTable[MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS];

-

-

-/** Task to handle the calling of each registered application's callback function, to process and generate TCP packets at the application

- *  level. If an application produces a response, this task constructs the appropriate Ethernet frame and places it into the Ethernet OUT

- *  buffer for later transmission.

- */

-void TCP_TCPTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* RNDISInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	/* Run each application in sequence, to process incoming and generate outgoing packets */

-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)

-	{

-		/* Find the corresponding port entry in the port table */

-		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)

-		{

-			/* Run the application handler for the port */

-			if ((PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  == ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port) && 

-			    (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Open))

-			{

-				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry],

-				                                               &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer);

-			}

-		}

-	}

-	

-	/* Get pointer to the output frame info struct for convenience */

-	Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameOUT = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT;

-	

-	/* Bail out early if there is already a frame waiting to be sent in the Ethernet OUT buffer */

-	if (FrameOUT->FrameInBuffer)

-	  return;

-	

-	/* Send response packets from each application as the TCP packet buffers are filled by the applications */

-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)

-	{

-		/* For each completely received packet, pass it along to the listening application */

-		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT) &&

-		    (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready))

-		{

-			Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData;

-			IP_Header_t*             IPHeaderOUT    = (IP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)];

-			TCP_Header_t*            TCPHeaderOUT   = (TCP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +

-			                                                                              sizeof(IP_Header_t)];

-			void*                    TCPDataOUT     = &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +

-			                                                               sizeof(IP_Header_t) +

-			                                                               sizeof(TCP_Header_t)];

-

-			uint16_t PacketSize = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Length;

-

-			/* Fill out the TCP data */

-			TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port;

-			TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort;

-			TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut);

-			TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberIn);

-			TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));

-			TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize           = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);

-

-			TCPHeaderOUT->Flags                = TCP_FLAG_ACK;

-			TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;

-			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;

-			TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;

-

-			memcpy(TCPDataOUT, ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Data, PacketSize);

-			

-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut += PacketSize;

-

-			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, ServerIPAddress,

-			                                                    ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress,

-			                                                    (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) + PacketSize));

-

-			PacketSize += sizeof(TCP_Header_t);

-

-			/* Fill out the response IP header */

-			IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + PacketSize);

-			IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;

-			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));

-			IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;

-			IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;

-			IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;

-			IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;

-			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;

-			IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = PROTOCOL_TCP;

-			IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;

-			IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = ServerIPAddress;

-			IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress;

-			

-			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));

-		

-			PacketSize += sizeof(IP_Header_t);

-		

-			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */

-			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;

-			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = (MAC_Address_t){{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}};

-			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = SwapEndian_16(ETHERTYPE_IPV4);

-

-			PacketSize += sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t);

-

-			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */

-			FrameOUT->FrameLength           = PacketSize;

-			FrameOUT->FrameInBuffer         = true;

-			

-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready = false;

-			

-			break;

-		}

-	}

-}

-

-/** Initializes the TCP protocol handler, clearing the port and connection state tables. This must be called before TCP packets are

- *  processed.

- */

-void TCP_Init(void)

-{

-	/* Initialize the port state table with all CLOSED entries */

-	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)

-	  PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = TCP_Port_Closed;

-

-	/* Initialize the connection table with all CLOSED entries */

-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)

-	  ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = TCP_Connection_Closed;

-}

-

-/** Sets the state and callback handler of the given port, specified in big endian to the given state.

- *

- *  \param[in] Port     Port whose state and callback function to set, specified in big endian

- *  \param[in] State    New state of the port, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum

- *  \param[in] Handler  Application callback handler for the port

- *

- *  \return Boolean true if the port state was set, false otherwise (no more space in the port state table)

- */

-bool TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*))

-{

-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */

-

-	/* Check to see if the port entry is already in the port state table */

-	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)

-	{

-		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, update it if found */

-		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)

-		{

-			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;

-			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;

-			return true;

-		}

-	}

-

-	/* Check if trying to open the port -- if so we need to find an unused (closed) entry and replace it */

-	if (State == TCP_Port_Open)

-	{

-		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)

-		{

-			/* Find a closed port entry in the table, change it to the given port and state */

-			if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Closed)

-			{

-				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  = Port;

-				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;

-				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;

-				return true;

-			}

-		}

-		

-		/* Port not in table and no room to add it, return failure */

-		return false;

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		/* Port not in table but trying to close it, so operation successful */

-		return true;

-	}

-}

-

-/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP port, specified in big endian.

- *

- *  \param[in] Port  TCP port whose state is to be retrieved, given in big-endian

- *

- *  \return A value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum

- */

-uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port)

-{

-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */

-

-	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)

-	{

-		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, return the port status if found */

-		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)

-		  return PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State;

-	}

-	

-	/* Port not in table, assume closed */

-	return TCP_Port_Closed;

-}

-

-/** Sets the connection state of the given port, remote address and remote port to the given TCP connection state. If the

- *  connection exists in the connection state table it is updated, otherwise it is created if possible.

- *

- *  \param[in] Port           TCP port of the connection on the device, specified in big endian

- *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected device

- *  \param[in] RemotePort     TCP port of the remote device in the connection, specified in big endian

- *  \param[in] State          TCP connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum

- *

- *  \return Boolean true if the connection was updated or created, false otherwise (no more space in the connection state table)

- */

-bool TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State)

-{

-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */

-

-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)

-	{

-		/* Find port entry in the table */

-		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&

-		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&

-			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)

-		{

-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State;

-			return true;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)

-	{

-		/* Find empty entry in the table */

-		if (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State == TCP_Connection_Closed)

-		{

-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port          = Port;

-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress = RemoteAddress;			

-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort    = RemotePort;

-			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State         = State;

-			return true;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return false;

-}

-

-/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP connection to a host.

- *

- *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian

- *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host

- *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian

- *

- *  \return A value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum

- */

-uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)

-{

-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */

-

-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)

-	{

-		/* Find port entry in the table */

-		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&

-		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&

-			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)

-			 

-		{

-			return ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return TCP_Connection_Closed;

-}

-

-/** Retrieves the connection info structure of a given connection to a host.

- *

- *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian

- *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host

- *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian

- *

- *  \return ConnectionInfo structure of the connection if found, NULL otherwise

- */

-TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)

-{

-	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */

-

-	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)

-	{

-		/* Find port entry in the table */

-		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&

-		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&

-			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)

-		{

-			return &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info;

-		}

-	}

-	

-	return NULL;

-}

-

-/** Processes a TCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response

- *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a application handler.

- *

- *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header

- *  \param[in] TCPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's TCP header

- *  \param[out] TCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's TCP header

- *

- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no

- *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the

- *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration

- */

-int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart)

-{

-	IP_Header_t*  IPHeaderIN   = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;

-	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderIN  = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderInStart;

-	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart;

-

-	TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* ConnectionInfo;

-	

-	DecodeTCPHeader(TCPHeaderInStart);

-

-	bool PacketResponse = false;

-		

-	/* Check if the destination port is open and allows incoming connections */

-	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Open)

-	{

-		/* Detect SYN from host to start a connection */

-		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_SYN)

-		  TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Listen);

-

-		/* Detect RST from host to abort existing connection */

-		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_RST)

-		{

-			if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-			                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed))

-			{

-				TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				

-				PacketResponse = true;			

-			}

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			/* Process the incoming TCP packet based on the current connection state for the sender and port */

-			switch (TCP_GetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort))

-			{

-				case TCP_Connection_Listen:

-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_SYN)

-					{

-						/* SYN connection starts a connection with a peer */

-						if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-						                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_SYNReceived))

-						{

-							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_SYN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);						

-

-							ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);

-

-							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn  = (SwapEndian_32(TCPHeaderIN->SequenceNumber) + 1);

-							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut = 0;

-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse      = false;

-						}

-						else

-						{

-							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_RST;

-						}

-											   

-						PacketResponse      = true;

-					}

-					

-					break;

-				case TCP_Connection_SYNReceived:

-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)

-					{

-						/* ACK during the connection process completes the connection to a peer */

-

-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Established);

-

-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);

-															   

-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;

-					}

-					

-					break;

-				case TCP_Connection_Established:

-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))

-					{

-						/* FIN ACK when connected to a peer starts the finalization process */

-					

-						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				

-						PacketResponse      = true;

-						

-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_CloseWait);

-

-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);

-

-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;

-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;

-					}

-					else if ((TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_PSH)))

-					{

-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);

-

-						/* Check if the buffer is currently in use either by a buffered data to send, or receive */		

-						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse == false) && (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready == false))

-						{						

-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_IN;

-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse     = true;

-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    = 0;

-						}

-						

-						/* Check if the buffer has been claimed by us to read in data from the peer */

-						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN) &&

-							(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length != TCP_WINDOW_SIZE))

-						{

-							uint16_t IPOffset   = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));

-							uint16_t TCPOffset  = (TCPHeaderIN->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));

-							uint16_t DataLength = (SwapEndian_16(IPHeaderIN->TotalLength) - IPOffset - TCPOffset);

-

-							/* Copy the packet data into the buffer */

-							memcpy(&ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Data[ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length],

-								   &((uint8_t*)TCPHeaderInStart)[TCPOffset],

-								   DataLength);

-

-							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn += DataLength;

-							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    += DataLength;

-							

-							/* Check if the buffer is full or if the PSH flag is set, if so indicate buffer ready */

-							if ((!(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length)) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_PSH))

-							{

-								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;

-								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready = true;

-

-								TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;

-								PacketResponse      = true;

-							}

-						}

-						else

-						{

-							/* Buffer is currently in use by the application, defer processing of the incoming packet */

-							return NO_PROCESS;

-						}

-					}

-					

-					break;

-				case TCP_Connection_Closing:

-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);

-

-						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_FIN);

-						PacketResponse      = true;

-						

-						ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;

-						

-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait1);

-

-					break;

-				case TCP_Connection_FINWait1:

-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))

-					{

-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);

-

-						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;

-						PacketResponse      = true;

-

-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;

-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;

-						

-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);

-					}

-					else if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)

-					{

-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait2);

-					}

-					

-					break;

-				case TCP_Connection_FINWait2:

-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))

-					{

-						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);

-

-						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;

-						PacketResponse      = true;

-

-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;

-						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;

-						

-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);

-					}

-				

-					break;

-				case TCP_Connection_CloseWait:

-					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)

-					{

-						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);

-					}

-					

-					break;

-			}

-		}

-	}

-	else

-	{

-		/* Port is not open, indicate via a RST/ACK response to the sender */

-		TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				

-		PacketResponse      = true;

-	}

-	

-	/* Check if we need to respond to the sent packet */

-	if (PacketResponse)

-	{

-		ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,

-		                                       TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);

-

-		TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;

-		TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort;

-		TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut);

-		TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn);

-		TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));

-		

-		if (!(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse))

-		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);

-		else

-		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length);

-

-		TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;

-		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;

-		TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;

-		

-		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress,

-		                                                    IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, sizeof(TCP_Header_t));					

-

-		return sizeof(TCP_Header_t);	

-	}

-

-	return NO_RESPONSE;

-}

-

-/** Calculates the appropriate TCP checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's compliment of each word,

- *  complimented.

- *

- *  \param[in] TCPHeaderOutStart   Pointer to the start of the packet's outgoing TCP header

- *  \param[in] SourceAddress       Source protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header

- *  \param[in] DestinationAddress  Destination protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header

- *  \param[in] TCPOutSize          Size in bytes of the TCP data header and payload

- *

- *  \return A 16-bit TCP checksum value

- */

-static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,

-                               IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize)

-{

-	uint32_t Checksum = 0;

-	

-	/* TCP/IP checksums are the addition of the one's compliment of each word including the IP pseudo-header,

-	   complimented */

-	

-	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[0];

-	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[1];

-	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[0];

-	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[1];

-	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(PROTOCOL_TCP);

-	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(TCPOutSize);

-

-	for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (TCPOutSize >> 1); CurrWord++)

-	  Checksum += ((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[CurrWord];

-	

-	if (TCPOutSize & 0x01)

-	  Checksum += (((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[TCPOutSize >> 1] & 0x00FF);

-	  

-	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)

-	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));

-	

-	return ~Checksum;

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles the reliable in-order transmission
+ *  and reception of packets to and from devices on a network, to "ports" on the device. It is used in situations where data
+ *  delivery must be reliable and correct, e.g. HTTP, TELNET and most other non-streaming protocols.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C
+#include "TCP.h"
+
+/** Port state table array. This contains the current status of TCP ports in the device. To save on space, only open ports are
+ *  stored - closed ports may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any ports not present in the array are closed. This
+ *  allows for MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS to be less than the number of ports used by the application if desired.
+ */
+TCP_PortState_t        PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
+
+/** Connection state table array. This contains the current status of TCP connections in the device. To save on space, only active
+ *  (non-closed) connections are stored - closed connections may be overwritten at any time, and the system will assume any connections
+ *  not present in the array are closed.
+ */
+TCP_ConnectionState_t  ConnectionStateTable[MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS];
+
+
+/** Task to handle the calling of each registered application's callback function, to process and generate TCP packets at the application
+ *  level. If an application produces a response, this task constructs the appropriate Ethernet frame and places it into the Ethernet OUT
+ *  buffer for later transmission.
+ */
+void TCP_TCPTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* RNDISInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Run each application in sequence, to process incoming and generate outgoing packets */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find the corresponding port entry in the port table */
+		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+		{
+			/* Run the application handler for the port */
+			if ((PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  == ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port) && 
+			    (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Open))
+			{
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry],
+				                                               &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	
+	/* Get pointer to the output frame info struct for convenience */
+	Ethernet_Frame_Info_t* FrameOUT = &RNDISInterfaceInfo->State.FrameOUT;
+	
+	/* Bail out early if there is already a frame waiting to be sent in the Ethernet OUT buffer */
+	if (FrameOUT->FrameInBuffer)
+	  return;
+	
+	/* Send response packets from each application as the TCP packet buffers are filled by the applications */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* For each completely received packet, pass it along to the listening application */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT) &&
+		    (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready))
+		{
+			Ethernet_Frame_Header_t* FrameOUTHeader = (Ethernet_Frame_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData;
+			IP_Header_t*             IPHeaderOUT    = (IP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t)];
+			TCP_Header_t*            TCPHeaderOUT   = (TCP_Header_t*)&FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
+			                                                                              sizeof(IP_Header_t)];
+			void*                    TCPDataOUT     = &FrameOUT->FrameData[sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t) +
+			                                                               sizeof(IP_Header_t) +
+			                                                               sizeof(TCP_Header_t)];
+
+			uint16_t PacketSize = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Length;
+
+			/* Fill out the TCP data */
+			TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut);
+			TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberIn);
+			TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+			TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize           = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
+
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Flags                = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
+
+			memcpy(TCPDataOUT, ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Data, PacketSize);
+			
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.SequenceNumberOut += PacketSize;
+
+			TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, ServerIPAddress,
+			                                                    ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress,
+			                                                    (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) + PacketSize));
+
+			PacketSize += sizeof(TCP_Header_t);
+
+			/* Fill out the response IP header */
+			IPHeaderOUT->TotalLength        = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(IP_Header_t) + PacketSize);
+			IPHeaderOUT->TypeOfService      = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderLength       = (sizeof(IP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+			IPHeaderOUT->Version            = 4;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Flags              = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->FragmentOffset     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Identification     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = 0;
+			IPHeaderOUT->Protocol           = PROTOCOL_TCP;
+			IPHeaderOUT->TTL                = DEFAULT_TTL;
+			IPHeaderOUT->SourceAddress      = ServerIPAddress;
+			IPHeaderOUT->DestinationAddress = ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress;
+			
+			IPHeaderOUT->HeaderChecksum     = Ethernet_Checksum16(IPHeaderOUT, sizeof(IP_Header_t));
+		
+			PacketSize += sizeof(IP_Header_t);
+		
+			/* Fill out the response Ethernet frame header */
+			FrameOUTHeader->Source          = ServerMACAddress;
+			FrameOUTHeader->Destination     = (MAC_Address_t){{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}};
+			FrameOUTHeader->EtherType       = SwapEndian_16(ETHERTYPE_IPV4);
+
+			PacketSize += sizeof(Ethernet_Frame_Header_t);
+
+			/* Set the response length in the buffer and indicate that a response is ready to be sent */
+			FrameOUT->FrameLength           = PacketSize;
+			FrameOUT->FrameInBuffer         = true;
+			
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info.Buffer.Ready = false;
+			
+			break;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Initializes the TCP protocol handler, clearing the port and connection state tables. This must be called before TCP packets are
+ *  processed.
+ */
+void TCP_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Initialize the port state table with all CLOSED entries */
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS; PTableEntry++)
+	  PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = TCP_Port_Closed;
+
+	/* Initialize the connection table with all CLOSED entries */
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	  ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = TCP_Connection_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Sets the state and callback handler of the given port, specified in big endian to the given state.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port     Port whose state and callback function to set, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] State    New state of the port, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum
+ *  \param[in] Handler  Application callback handler for the port
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the port state was set, false otherwise (no more space in the port state table)
+ */
+bool TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*))
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	/* Check to see if the port entry is already in the port state table */
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, update it if found */
+		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
+		{
+			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
+			PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Check if trying to open the port -- if so we need to find an unused (closed) entry and replace it */
+	if (State == TCP_Port_Open)
+	{
+		for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
+		{
+			/* Find a closed port entry in the table, change it to the given port and state */
+			if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State == TCP_Port_Closed)
+			{
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port  = Port;
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State = State;
+				PortStateTable[PTableEntry].ApplicationHandler = Handler;
+				return true;
+			}
+		}
+		
+		/* Port not in table and no room to add it, return failure */
+		return false;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Port not in table but trying to close it, so operation successful */
+		return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP port, specified in big endian.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port  TCP port whose state is to be retrieved, given in big-endian
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t PTableEntry = 0; PTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; PTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find existing entry for the port in the table, return the port status if found */
+		if (PortStateTable[PTableEntry].Port == Port)
+		  return PortStateTable[PTableEntry].State;
+	}
+	
+	/* Port not in table, assume closed */
+	return TCP_Port_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Sets the connection state of the given port, remote address and remote port to the given TCP connection state. If the
+ *  connection exists in the connection state table it is updated, otherwise it is created if possible.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port of the connection on the device, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected device
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     TCP port of the remote device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] State          TCP connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the connection was updated or created, false otherwise (no more space in the connection state table)
+ */
+bool TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+		{
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State = State;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find empty entry in the table */
+		if (ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State == TCP_Connection_Closed)
+		{
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port          = Port;
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress = RemoteAddress;			
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort    = RemotePort;
+			ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State         = State;
+			return true;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current state of a given TCP connection to a host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+			 
+		{
+			return ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].State;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return TCP_Connection_Closed;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the connection info structure of a given connection to a host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Port           TCP port on the device in the connection, specified in big endian
+ *  \param[in] RemoteAddress  Remote protocol IP address of the connected host
+ *  \param[in] RemotePort     Remote TCP port of the connected host, specified in big endian
+ *
+ *  \return ConnectionInfo structure of the connection if found, NULL otherwise
+ */
+TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort)
+{
+	/* Note, Port number should be specified in BIG endian to simplify network code */
+
+	for (uint8_t CSTableEntry = 0; CSTableEntry < MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS; CSTableEntry++)
+	{
+		/* Find port entry in the table */
+		if ((ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Port == Port) &&
+		     IP_COMPARE(&ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemoteAddress, &RemoteAddress) &&
+			 ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].RemotePort == RemotePort)
+		{
+			return &ConnectionStateTable[CSTableEntry].Info;
+		}
+	}
+	
+	return NULL;
+}
+
+/** Processes a TCP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if one is created by a application handler.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] TCPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's TCP header
+ *  \param[out] TCPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's TCP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE if no
+ *           response was generated, NO_PROCESS if the packet processing was deferred until the
+ *           next Ethernet packet handler iteration
+ */
+int16_t TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	IP_Header_t*  IPHeaderIN   = (IP_Header_t*)IPHeaderInStart;
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderIN  = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderInStart;
+	TCP_Header_t* TCPHeaderOUT = (TCP_Header_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart;
+
+	TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* ConnectionInfo;
+	
+	DecodeTCPHeader(TCPHeaderInStart);
+
+	bool PacketResponse = false;
+		
+	/* Check if the destination port is open and allows incoming connections */
+	if (TCP_GetPortState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort) == TCP_Port_Open)
+	{
+		/* Detect SYN from host to start a connection */
+		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_SYN)
+		  TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Listen);
+
+		/* Detect RST from host to abort existing connection */
+		if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_RST)
+		{
+			if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+			                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed))
+			{
+				TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
+				PacketResponse = true;			
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Process the incoming TCP packet based on the current connection state for the sender and port */
+			switch (TCP_GetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort))
+			{
+				case TCP_Connection_Listen:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_SYN)
+					{
+						/* SYN connection starts a connection with a peer */
+						if (TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+						                           TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_SYNReceived))
+						{
+							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_SYN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);						
+
+							ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn  = (SwapEndian_32(TCPHeaderIN->SequenceNumber) + 1);
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut = 0;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse      = false;
+						}
+						else
+						{
+							TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_RST;
+						}
+											   
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+					}
+					
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_SYNReceived:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						/* ACK during the connection process completes the connection to a peer */
+
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Established);
+
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+															   
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+					}
+					
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_Established:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						/* FIN ACK when connected to a peer starts the finalization process */
+					
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+						
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_CloseWait);
+
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+					}
+					else if ((TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_PSH)))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						/* Check if the buffer is currently in use either by a buffered data to send, or receive */		
+						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse == false) && (ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready == false))
+						{						
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_IN;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse     = true;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    = 0;
+						}
+						
+						/* Check if the buffer has been claimed by us to read in data from the peer */
+						if ((ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN) &&
+							(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length != TCP_WINDOW_SIZE))
+						{
+							uint16_t IPOffset   = (IPHeaderIN->HeaderLength * sizeof(uint32_t));
+							uint16_t TCPOffset  = (TCPHeaderIN->DataOffset * sizeof(uint32_t));
+							uint16_t DataLength = (SwapEndian_16(IPHeaderIN->TotalLength) - IPOffset - TCPOffset);
+
+							/* Copy the packet data into the buffer */
+							memcpy(&ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Data[ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length],
+								   &((uint8_t*)TCPHeaderInStart)[TCPOffset],
+								   DataLength);
+
+							ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn += DataLength;
+							ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length    += DataLength;
+							
+							/* Check if the buffer is full or if the PSH flag is set, if so indicate buffer ready */
+							if ((!(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length)) || (TCPHeaderIN->Flags & TCP_FLAG_PSH))
+							{
+								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
+								ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Ready = true;
+
+								TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+								PacketResponse      = true;
+							}
+						}
+						else
+						{
+							/* Buffer is currently in use by the application, defer processing of the incoming packet */
+							return NO_PROCESS;
+						}
+					}
+					
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_Closing:
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_ACK | TCP_FLAG_FIN);
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+						
+						ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse = false;
+						
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait1);
+
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_FINWait1:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+						
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+					else if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_FINWait2);
+					}
+					
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_FINWait2:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == (TCP_FLAG_FIN | TCP_FLAG_ACK))
+					{
+						ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+															   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+						TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = TCP_FLAG_ACK;
+						PacketResponse      = true;
+
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn++;
+						ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut++;
+						
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+				
+					break;
+				case TCP_Connection_CloseWait:
+					if (TCPHeaderIN->Flags == TCP_FLAG_ACK)
+					{
+						TCP_SetConnectionState(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+											   TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort, TCP_Connection_Closed);
+					}
+					
+					break;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Port is not open, indicate via a RST/ACK response to the sender */
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Flags = (TCP_FLAG_RST | TCP_FLAG_ACK);				
+		PacketResponse      = true;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check if we need to respond to the sent packet */
+	if (PacketResponse)
+	{
+		ConnectionInfo = TCP_GetConnectionInfo(TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort, IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress,
+		                                       TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort);
+
+		TCPHeaderOUT->SourcePort           = TCPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort      = TCPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->SequenceNumber       = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberOut);
+		TCPHeaderOUT->AcknowledgmentNumber = SwapEndian_32(ConnectionInfo->SequenceNumberIn);
+		TCPHeaderOUT->DataOffset           = (sizeof(TCP_Header_t) / sizeof(uint32_t));
+		
+		if (!(ConnectionInfo->Buffer.InUse))
+		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE);
+		else
+		  TCPHeaderOUT->WindowSize         = SwapEndian_16(TCP_WINDOW_SIZE - ConnectionInfo->Buffer.Length);
+
+		TCPHeaderOUT->UrgentPointer        = 0;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = 0;
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Reserved             = 0;
+		
+		TCPHeaderOUT->Checksum             = TCP_Checksum16(TCPHeaderOUT, IPHeaderIN->DestinationAddress,
+		                                                    IPHeaderIN->SourceAddress, sizeof(TCP_Header_t));					
+
+		return sizeof(TCP_Header_t);	
+	}
+
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
+
+/** Calculates the appropriate TCP checksum, consisting of the addition of the one's compliment of each word,
+ *  complimented.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] TCPHeaderOutStart   Pointer to the start of the packet's outgoing TCP header
+ *  \param[in] SourceAddress       Source protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
+ *  \param[in] DestinationAddress  Destination protocol IP address of the outgoing IP header
+ *  \param[in] TCPOutSize          Size in bytes of the TCP data header and payload
+ *
+ *  \return A 16-bit TCP checksum value
+ */
+static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,
+                               IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize)
+{
+	uint32_t Checksum = 0;
+	
+	/* TCP/IP checksums are the addition of the one's compliment of each word including the IP pseudo-header,
+	   complimented */
+	
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[0];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&SourceAddress)[1];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[0];
+	Checksum += ((uint16_t*)&DestinationAddress)[1];
+	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(PROTOCOL_TCP);
+	Checksum += SwapEndian_16(TCPOutSize);
+
+	for (uint8_t CurrWord = 0; CurrWord < (TCPOutSize >> 1); CurrWord++)
+	  Checksum += ((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[CurrWord];
+	
+	if (TCPOutSize & 0x01)
+	  Checksum += (((uint16_t*)TCPHeaderOutStart)[TCPOutSize >> 1] & 0x00FF);
+	  
+	while (Checksum & 0xFFFF0000)
+	  Checksum = ((Checksum & 0xFFFF) + (Checksum >> 16));
+	
+	return ~Checksum;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h
index d84256024..4baa0898f 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/TCP.h
@@ -1,249 +1,249 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for TCP.c.

- */

-

-#ifndef _TCP_H_

-#define _TCP_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-		#include <stdbool.h>

-		

-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"

-		#include "Ethernet.h"

-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"

-		

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** Maximum number of TCP ports which can be open at the one time */

-		#define MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS              1

-

-		/** Maximum number of TCP connections which can be sustained at the one time */

-		#define MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS             3

-

-		/** TCP window size, giving the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered at the one time */

-		#define TCP_WINDOW_SIZE                 512

-		

-		/** Port number for HTTP transmissions */

-		#define TCP_PORT_HTTP                   SwapEndian_16(80)

-		

-		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from host-to-device */

-		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_IN                false

-

-		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from device-to-host */

-		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT               true

-		

-		/** Congestion Window Reduced TCP flag mask */

-		#define TCP_FLAG_CWR                    (1 << 7)

-

-		/** Explicit Congestion Notification TCP flag mask */

-		#define TCP_FLAG_ECE                    (1 << 6)

-

-		/** Urgent TCP flag mask */

-		#define TCP_FLAG_URG                    (1 << 5)

-

-		/** Data Acknowledge TCP flag mask */

-		#define TCP_FLAG_ACK                    (1 << 4)

-

-		/** Data Push TCP flag mask */

-		#define TCP_FLAG_PSH                    (1 << 3)

-

-		/** Reset TCP flag mask */

-		#define TCP_FLAG_RST                    (1 << 2)

-

-		/** Synchronize TCP flag mask */

-		#define TCP_FLAG_SYN                    (1 << 1)

-

-		/** Connection Finalize TCP flag mask */

-		#define TCP_FLAG_FIN                    (1 << 0)

-		

-		/** Application macro: Determines if the given application buffer contains a packet received from the host

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check

-		 *

-		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer contains a packet from the host, false otherwise

-		 */

-		#define TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer)  (Buffer->Ready && (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN))

-

-		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application buffer is currently locked by the application for device-to-host transfers.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check

-		 *

-		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer has been captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise

-		 */

-		#define TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer) (!(Buffer->Ready) && Buffer->InUse && \

-		                                              (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT))

-

-		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application can lock the buffer for multiple continued device-to-host transmissions.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check

-		 *

-		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer may be captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise

-		 */

-		#define TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)   Buffer->InUse

-

-		/** Application macro: Captures the application buffer, locking it for device-to-host transmissions only. This should be

-		 *  performed when the application needs to transmit several packets worth of data in succession with no interruptions from the host.

-		 *

-		 *  \note The application must check that the buffer can be locked first using TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER().

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to lock

-		 */

-		#define TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)       MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->InUse = true; }MACROE

-

-		/** Application macro: Releases a captured application buffer, allowing for host-to-device packets to be received.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to release

-		 */

-		#define TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer)       MACROS{ Buffer->InUse = false; }MACROE

-

-		/** Application macro: Sends the contents of the given application buffer to the host.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to send

-		 *  \param[in] Len     Length of data contained in the buffer

-		 */

-		#define TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Len)     MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->Length = Len; Buffer->Ready = true; }MACROE

-

-		/** Application macro: Clears the application buffer, ready for a packet to be written to it.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to clear

-		 */

-		#define TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer)         MACROS{ Buffer->Ready = false; Buffer->Length = 0; }MACROE

-		

-		/** Application macro: Closes an open connection to a host.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] Connection  Open TCP connection to close

-		 */

-		#define TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(Connection)  MACROS{ Connection->State = TCP_Connection_Closing;  }MACROE

-

-	/* Enums: */

-		/** Enum for possible TCP port states */

-		enum TCP_PortStates_t

-		{

-			TCP_Port_Closed            = 0, /**< TCP port closed, no connections to a host may be made on this port. */

-			TCP_Port_Open              = 1, /**< TCP port open, connections to a host may be made on this port. */

-		};

-	

-		/** Enum for possible TCP connection states */

-		enum TCP_ConnectionStates_t

-		{

-			TCP_Connection_Listen      = 0, /**< Listening for a connection from a host */

-			TCP_Connection_SYNSent     = 1, /**< Unused */

-			TCP_Connection_SYNReceived = 2, /**< SYN received, waiting for ACK */

-			TCP_Connection_Established = 3, /**< Connection established in both directions */

-			TCP_Connection_FINWait1    = 4, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */

-			TCP_Connection_FINWait2    = 5, /**< Closing, waiting for FIN ACK */

-			TCP_Connection_CloseWait   = 6, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */

-			TCP_Connection_Closing     = 7, /**< Unused */

-			TCP_Connection_LastACK     = 8, /**< Unused */

-			TCP_Connection_TimeWait    = 9, /**< Unused */

-			TCP_Connection_Closed      = 10, /**< Connection closed in both directions */			

-		};

-	

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** Type define for a TCP connection buffer structure, including size, data and direction */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint16_t               Length; /**< Length of data in the TCP application buffer */

-			uint8_t                Data[TCP_WINDOW_SIZE]; /**< TCP application data buffer */

-			bool                   Direction; /**< Buffer transmission direction, either TCP_PACKETDIR_IN  or TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT */

-			bool                   Ready; /**< If data from host, indicates buffer ready to be read, otherwise indicates

-			                               *   buffer ready to be sent to the host

-			                               */

-			bool                   InUse; /** Indicates if the buffer is locked to to the current direction, and cannot be changed */

-		} TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t;

-

-		/** Type define for a TCP connection information structure */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint32_t               SequenceNumberIn; /**< Current TCP sequence number for host-to-device */	

-			uint32_t               SequenceNumberOut; /**< Current TCP sequence number for device-to-host */

-			TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t Buffer; /**< Connection application data buffer */

-		} TCP_ConnectionInfo_t;

-

-		/** Type define for a complete TCP connection state */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint16_t               Port; /**< Connection port number on the device */

-			uint16_t               RemotePort; /**< Connection port number on the host */

-			IP_Address_t           RemoteAddress; /**< Connection protocol IP address of the host */

-			TCP_ConnectionInfo_t   Info; /**< Connection information, including application buffer */

-			uint8_t                State; /**< Current connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum */

-		} TCP_ConnectionState_t;

-

-		/** Type define for a TCP port state */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint16_t               Port; /**< TCP port number on the device */

-			uint8_t                State; /**< Current port state, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum */

-			void                   (*ApplicationHandler) (TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState,

-			                                              TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer); /**< Port application handler */

-		} TCP_PortState_t;

-

-		/** Type define for a TCP packet header */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint16_t               SourcePort; /**< Source port of the TCP packet */

-			uint16_t               DestinationPort; /**< Destination port of the TCP packet */

-			

-			uint32_t               SequenceNumber; /**< Data sequence number of the packet */

-			uint32_t               AcknowledgmentNumber; /**< Data acknowledgment number of the packet */

-			

-			unsigned char          Reserved : 4; /**< Reserved, must be all 0 */

-			unsigned char          DataOffset : 4; /**< Offset of the data from the start of the header, in 4 byte chunks */

-			uint8_t                Flags; /**< TCP packet flags */

-			uint16_t               WindowSize; /**< Current data window size (bytes remaining in reception buffer) */

-			

-			uint16_t               Checksum; /**< TCP checksum */

-			uint16_t               UrgentPointer; /**< Urgent data pointer */

-		} TCP_Header_t;

-		

-	/* External Variables: */

-		TCP_PortState_t PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];

-

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		void                  TCP_TCPTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* RNDISInterfaceInfo);

-		void                  TCP_Init(void);

-		bool                  TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*));

-		uint8_t               TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port);

-		bool                  TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State);

-		uint8_t               TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);

-		TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);

-		int16_t               TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart);

-

-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C)

-			static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,

-										   IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize);

-		#endif

-

-#endif

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TCP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TCP_H_
+#define _TCP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum number of TCP ports which can be open at the one time */
+		#define MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS              1
+
+		/** Maximum number of TCP connections which can be sustained at the one time */
+		#define MAX_TCP_CONNECTIONS             3
+
+		/** TCP window size, giving the maximum number of bytes which can be buffered at the one time */
+		#define TCP_WINDOW_SIZE                 512
+		
+		/** Port number for HTTP transmissions */
+		#define TCP_PORT_HTTP                   SwapEndian_16(80)
+		
+		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from host-to-device */
+		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_IN                false
+
+		/** Data direction indicator for a TCP application buffer, indicating data from device-to-host */
+		#define TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT               true
+		
+		/** Congestion Window Reduced TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_CWR                    (1 << 7)
+
+		/** Explicit Congestion Notification TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_ECE                    (1 << 6)
+
+		/** Urgent TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_URG                    (1 << 5)
+
+		/** Data Acknowledge TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_ACK                    (1 << 4)
+
+		/** Data Push TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_PSH                    (1 << 3)
+
+		/** Reset TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_RST                    (1 << 2)
+
+		/** Synchronize TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_SYN                    (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Connection Finalize TCP flag mask */
+		#define TCP_FLAG_FIN                    (1 << 0)
+		
+		/** Application macro: Determines if the given application buffer contains a packet received from the host
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer contains a packet from the host, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer)  (Buffer->Ready && (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_IN))
+
+		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application buffer is currently locked by the application for device-to-host transfers.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer has been captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer) (!(Buffer->Ready) && Buffer->InUse && \
+		                                              (Buffer->Direction == TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT))
+
+		/** Application macro: Indicates if the application can lock the buffer for multiple continued device-to-host transmissions.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to check
+		 *
+		 *  \return Boolean true if the buffer may be captured by the application for device-to-host transmissions, false otherwise
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)   Buffer->InUse
+
+		/** Application macro: Captures the application buffer, locking it for device-to-host transmissions only. This should be
+		 *  performed when the application needs to transmit several packets worth of data in succession with no interruptions from the host.
+		 *
+		 *  \note The application must check that the buffer can be locked first using TCP_APP_CAN_CAPTURE_BUFFER().
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to lock
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer)       MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->InUse = true; }MACROE
+
+		/** Application macro: Releases a captured application buffer, allowing for host-to-device packets to be received.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to release
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer)       MACROS{ Buffer->InUse = false; }MACROE
+
+		/** Application macro: Sends the contents of the given application buffer to the host.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to send
+		 *  \param[in] Len     Length of data contained in the buffer
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Len)     MACROS{ Buffer->Direction = TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT; Buffer->Length = Len; Buffer->Ready = true; }MACROE
+
+		/** Application macro: Clears the application buffer, ready for a packet to be written to it.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Buffer  Application buffer to clear
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer)         MACROS{ Buffer->Ready = false; Buffer->Length = 0; }MACROE
+		
+		/** Application macro: Closes an open connection to a host.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Connection  Open TCP connection to close
+		 */
+		#define TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(Connection)  MACROS{ Connection->State = TCP_Connection_Closing;  }MACROE
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for possible TCP port states */
+		enum TCP_PortStates_t
+		{
+			TCP_Port_Closed            = 0, /**< TCP port closed, no connections to a host may be made on this port. */
+			TCP_Port_Open              = 1, /**< TCP port open, connections to a host may be made on this port. */
+		};
+	
+		/** Enum for possible TCP connection states */
+		enum TCP_ConnectionStates_t
+		{
+			TCP_Connection_Listen      = 0, /**< Listening for a connection from a host */
+			TCP_Connection_SYNSent     = 1, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_SYNReceived = 2, /**< SYN received, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_Established = 3, /**< Connection established in both directions */
+			TCP_Connection_FINWait1    = 4, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_FINWait2    = 5, /**< Closing, waiting for FIN ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_CloseWait   = 6, /**< Closing, waiting for ACK */
+			TCP_Connection_Closing     = 7, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_LastACK     = 8, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_TimeWait    = 9, /**< Unused */
+			TCP_Connection_Closed      = 10, /**< Connection closed in both directions */			
+		};
+	
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a TCP connection buffer structure, including size, data and direction */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Length; /**< Length of data in the TCP application buffer */
+			uint8_t                Data[TCP_WINDOW_SIZE]; /**< TCP application data buffer */
+			bool                   Direction; /**< Buffer transmission direction, either TCP_PACKETDIR_IN  or TCP_PACKETDIR_OUT */
+			bool                   Ready; /**< If data from host, indicates buffer ready to be read, otherwise indicates
+			                               *   buffer ready to be sent to the host
+			                               */
+			bool                   InUse; /** Indicates if the buffer is locked to to the current direction, and cannot be changed */
+		} TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP connection information structure */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumberIn; /**< Current TCP sequence number for host-to-device */	
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumberOut; /**< Current TCP sequence number for device-to-host */
+			TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t Buffer; /**< Connection application data buffer */
+		} TCP_ConnectionInfo_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a complete TCP connection state */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Port; /**< Connection port number on the device */
+			uint16_t               RemotePort; /**< Connection port number on the host */
+			IP_Address_t           RemoteAddress; /**< Connection protocol IP address of the host */
+			TCP_ConnectionInfo_t   Info; /**< Connection information, including application buffer */
+			uint8_t                State; /**< Current connection state, a value from the TCP_ConnectionStates_t enum */
+		} TCP_ConnectionState_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP port state */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               Port; /**< TCP port number on the device */
+			uint8_t                State; /**< Current port state, a value from the TCP_PortStates_t enum */
+			void                   (*ApplicationHandler) (TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState,
+			                                              TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer); /**< Port application handler */
+		} TCP_PortState_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a TCP packet header */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t               SourcePort; /**< Source port of the TCP packet */
+			uint16_t               DestinationPort; /**< Destination port of the TCP packet */
+			
+			uint32_t               SequenceNumber; /**< Data sequence number of the packet */
+			uint32_t               AcknowledgmentNumber; /**< Data acknowledgment number of the packet */
+			
+			unsigned char          Reserved : 4; /**< Reserved, must be all 0 */
+			unsigned char          DataOffset : 4; /**< Offset of the data from the start of the header, in 4 byte chunks */
+			uint8_t                Flags; /**< TCP packet flags */
+			uint16_t               WindowSize; /**< Current data window size (bytes remaining in reception buffer) */
+			
+			uint16_t               Checksum; /**< TCP checksum */
+			uint16_t               UrgentPointer; /**< Urgent data pointer */
+		} TCP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* External Variables: */
+		TCP_PortState_t PortStateTable[MAX_OPEN_TCP_PORTS];
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void                  TCP_TCPTask(USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t* RNDISInterfaceInfo);
+		void                  TCP_Init(void);
+		bool                  TCP_SetPortState(uint16_t Port, uint8_t State, void (*Handler)(TCP_ConnectionState_t*, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t*));
+		uint8_t               TCP_GetPortState(uint16_t Port);
+		bool                  TCP_SetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort, uint8_t State);
+		uint8_t               TCP_GetConnectionState(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);
+		TCP_ConnectionInfo_t* TCP_GetConnectionInfo(uint16_t Port, IP_Address_t RemoteAddress, uint16_t RemotePort);
+		int16_t               TCP_ProcessTCPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderInStart, void* TCPHeaderOutStart);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TCP_C)
+			static uint16_t TCP_Checksum16(void* TCPHeaderOutStart, IP_Address_t SourceAddress,
+										   IP_Address_t DestinationAddress, uint16_t TCPOutSize);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c
index 47b0ab87a..c9c523f71 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.c
@@ -1,81 +1,81 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles high throughput, low

- *  reliability packets which are typically used to encapsulate streaming data.

- */

- 

-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_UDP_C

-#include "UDP.h"

-

-/** Processes a UDP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response

- *  to the output Ethernet frame if a sub-protocol handler has created a response packet.

- *

- *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header

- *  \param[in] UDPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's UDP header

- *  \param[out] UDPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's UDP header

- *

- *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise

- */

-int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart)

-{

-	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderIN  = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderInStart;

-	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderOUT = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart;

-	

-	int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;

-	

-	DecodeUDPHeader(UDPHeaderInStart);

-	

-	switch (SwapEndian_16(UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort))

-	{

-		case UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST:

-			RetSize = DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(IPHeaderInStart,

-			                                 &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderInStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)],

-		                                     &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)]);

-			break;

-	}

-	

-	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */

-	if (RetSize > 0)

-	{

-		/* Fill out the response UDP packet header */

-		UDPHeaderOUT->SourcePort      = UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;

-		UDPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = UDPHeaderIN->SourcePort;

-		UDPHeaderOUT->Checksum        = 0;

-		UDPHeaderOUT->Length          = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);

-

-		/* Return the size of the response so far */

-		return (sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);

-	}

-	

-	return NO_RESPONSE;

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet handling routines. This protocol handles high throughput, low
+ *  reliability packets which are typically used to encapsulate streaming data.
+ */
+ 
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_UDP_C
+#include "UDP.h"
+
+/** Processes a UDP packet inside an Ethernet frame, and writes the appropriate response
+ *  to the output Ethernet frame if a sub-protocol handler has created a response packet.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPHeaderInStart     Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's IP header
+ *  \param[in] UDPHeaderInStart    Pointer to the start of the incoming packet's UDP header
+ *  \param[out] UDPHeaderOutStart  Pointer to the start of the outgoing packet's UDP header
+ *
+ *  \return The number of bytes written to the out Ethernet frame if any, NO_RESPONSE otherwise
+ */
+int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart)
+{
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderIN  = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderInStart;
+	UDP_Header_t* UDPHeaderOUT = (UDP_Header_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart;
+	
+	int16_t RetSize = NO_RESPONSE;
+	
+	DecodeUDPHeader(UDPHeaderInStart);
+	
+	switch (SwapEndian_16(UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort))
+	{
+		case UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST:
+			RetSize = DHCP_ProcessDHCPPacket(IPHeaderInStart,
+			                                 &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderInStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)],
+		                                     &((uint8_t*)UDPHeaderOutStart)[sizeof(UDP_Header_t)]);
+			break;
+	}
+	
+	/* Check to see if the protocol processing routine has filled out a response */
+	if (RetSize > 0)
+	{
+		/* Fill out the response UDP packet header */
+		UDPHeaderOUT->SourcePort      = UDPHeaderIN->DestinationPort;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->DestinationPort = UDPHeaderIN->SourcePort;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->Checksum        = 0;
+		UDPHeaderOUT->Length          = SwapEndian_16(sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+
+		/* Return the size of the response so far */
+		return (sizeof(UDP_Header_t) + RetSize);
+	}
+	
+	return NO_RESPONSE;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h
index 7725d6c2f..73f7664f7 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/UDP.h
@@ -1,67 +1,67 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for IP.c.

- */

-

-#ifndef _UDP_H_

-#define _UDP_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-	

-		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"

-		#include "Ethernet.h"

-		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"

-		#include "DHCP.h"

-	

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** Source UDP port for a DHCP request */

-		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST 67

-

-		/** Destination UDP port for a DHCP reply */

-		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REPLY   68

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** Type define for a UDP packet header */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Packet source port */

-			uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Packet destination port */

-			uint16_t Length; /**< Total packet length, in bytes */

-			uint16_t Checksum; /**< Optional UDP packet checksum */

-		} UDP_Header_t;

-		

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart);

-

-#endif

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for IP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _UDP_H_
+#define _UDP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+	
+		#include "EthernetProtocols.h"
+		#include "Ethernet.h"
+		#include "ProtocolDecoders.h"
+		#include "DHCP.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Source UDP port for a DHCP request */
+		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REQUEST 67
+
+		/** Destination UDP port for a DHCP reply */
+		#define UDP_PORT_DHCP_REPLY   68
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a UDP packet header */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint16_t SourcePort; /**< Packet source port */
+			uint16_t DestinationPort; /**< Packet destination port */
+			uint16_t Length; /**< Total packet length, in bytes */
+			uint16_t Checksum; /**< Optional UDP packet checksum */
+		} UDP_Header_t;
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int16_t UDP_ProcessUDPPacket(void* IPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderInStart, void* UDPHeaderOutStart);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c
index 7f2502027..7f90de3b8 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.c
@@ -1,200 +1,200 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Simple webserver application for demonstrating the RNDIS demo and TCP/IP stack. This

- *  application will serve up a static HTTP web page when requested by the host.

- */

-

-#include "Webserver.h"

-

-/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the

- *  given location, and gives extra connection information.

- */

-char PROGMEM HTTP200Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"

-                               "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"

-                               "Content-type: text/html\r\n"

-                               "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";

-

-/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given

- *  given URL is invalid, and gives extra error information.

- */

-char PROGMEM HTTP404Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n"

-                               "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"

-                               "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";

-

-/** HTTP page to serve to the host when a HTTP request is made. This page is too long for a single response, thus it is automatically

- *  broken up into smaller blocks and sent as a series of packets each time the webserver application callback is run.

- */

-char PROGMEM HTTPPage[]   = 

-		"<html>"

-		"	<head>"

-		"		<title>"

-		"			LUFA Webserver Demo"

-		"		</title>"

-		"	</head>"

-		"	<body>"

-		"		<h1>Hello from your USB AVR!</h1>"

-		"		<p>"

-		"			Hello! Welcome to the LUFA RNDIS Demo Webserver test page, running on your USB AVR via the LUFA library. This demonstrates the HTTP webserver, TCP/IP stack and RNDIS demo all running atop the LUFA USB stack."

-		"			<br /><br />"

-		"			<small>Project Information: <a href=\"http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php\">http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php</a>.</small>"

-		"			<hr />"

-		"			<i>LUFA Version: </i>" LUFA_VERSION_STRING

-		"		</p>"

-		"	</body>"

-		"</html>";

-

-

-/** Initializes the Webserver application, opening the appropriate HTTP port in the TCP handler and registering the application

- *  callback routine for packets sent to the HTTP protocol port.

- */

-void Webserver_Init(void)

-{

-	/* Open the HTTP port in the TCP protocol so that HTTP connections to the device can be established */

-	TCP_SetPortState(TCP_PORT_HTTP, TCP_Port_Open, Webserver_ApplicationCallback);

-}

-

-/** Indicates if a given request equals the given HTTP command.

- *

- *  \param[in] RequestHeader  HTTP request made by the host

- *  \param[in] Command        HTTP command to compare the request to

- *

- *  \return Boolean true if the command matches the request, false otherwise

- */

-static bool IsHTTPCommand(uint8_t* RequestHeader, char* Command)

-{

-	/* Returns true if the non null terminated string in RequestHeader matches the null terminated string Command */

-	return (strncmp((char*)RequestHeader, Command, strlen(Command)) == 0);

-}

-

-/** Application callback routine, executed each time the TCP processing task runs. This callback determines what request

- *  has been made (if any), and serves up appropriate responses.

- *

- *  \param[in] ConnectionState  Pointer to a TCP Connection State structure giving connection information

- *  \param[in,out] Buffer       Pointer to the application's send/receive packet buffer

- */

-void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer)

-{

-	char*          BufferDataStr = (char*)Buffer->Data;

-	static uint8_t PageBlock     = 0;

-	

-	/* Check to see if a packet has been received on the HTTP port from a remote host */

-	if (TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer))

-	{

-		if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET"))

-		{

-			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET / "))

-			{

-				PageBlock = 0;

-

-				/* Copy the HTTP 200 response header into the packet buffer */

-				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);

-				

-				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */

-				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));

-

-				/* Lock the buffer to Device->Host transmissions only while we send the page contents */

-				TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer);

-			}

-			else

-			{

-				/* Copy the HTTP 404 response header into the packet buffer */

-				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);

-				

-				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */

-				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));

-				

-				/* All data sent, close the connection */

-				TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);

-			}

-		}

-		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD"))

-		{

-			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD / "))

-			{

-				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */

-				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);

-

-				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */

-				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));

-			}

-			else

-			{

-				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */

-				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);

-

-				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */

-				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));			

-			}

-			

-			/* All data sent, close the connection */

-			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);

-		}

-		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "TRACE"))

-		{

-			/* Echo the host's query back to the host */

-			TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Buffer->Length);

-			

-			/* All data sent, close the connection */

-			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);

-		}

-		else

-		{

-			/* Unknown request, just clear the buffer (drop the packet) */

-			TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer);

-		}

-	}

-	else if (TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer))

-	{

-		uint16_t RemLength = strlen_P(&HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE]);

-		uint16_t Length;

-	

-		/* Determine the length of the loaded block */

-		Length = ((RemLength > HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE) ? HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE : RemLength);

-

-		/* Copy the next buffer sized block of the page to the packet buffer */

-		strncpy_P(BufferDataStr, &HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE], Length);

-		

-		/* Send the buffer contents to the host */

-		TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Length);

-

-		/* Check to see if the entire page has been sent */

-		if (PageBlock++ == (sizeof(HTTPPage) / HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE))

-		{

-			/* Unlock the buffer so that the host can fill it with future packets */

-			TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer);

-			

-			/* Close the connection to the host */

-			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);

-		}

-	}

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Simple webserver application for demonstrating the RNDIS demo and TCP/IP stack. This
+ *  application will serve up a static HTTP web page when requested by the host.
+ */
+
+#include "Webserver.h"
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the
+ *  given location, and gives extra connection information.
+ */
+char PROGMEM HTTP200Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"
+                               "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
+                               "Content-type: text/html\r\n"
+                               "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given
+ *  given URL is invalid, and gives extra error information.
+ */
+char PROGMEM HTTP404Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n"
+                               "Server: LUFA RNDIS\r\n"
+                               "Connection: close\r\n\r\n";
+
+/** HTTP page to serve to the host when a HTTP request is made. This page is too long for a single response, thus it is automatically
+ *  broken up into smaller blocks and sent as a series of packets each time the webserver application callback is run.
+ */
+char PROGMEM HTTPPage[]   = 
+		"<html>"
+		"	<head>"
+		"		<title>"
+		"			LUFA Webserver Demo"
+		"		</title>"
+		"	</head>"
+		"	<body>"
+		"		<h1>Hello from your USB AVR!</h1>"
+		"		<p>"
+		"			Hello! Welcome to the LUFA RNDIS Demo Webserver test page, running on your USB AVR via the LUFA library. This demonstrates the HTTP webserver, TCP/IP stack and RNDIS demo all running atop the LUFA USB stack."
+		"			<br /><br />"
+		"			<small>Project Information: <a href=\"http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php\">http://www.fourwalledcubicle.com/LUFA.php</a>.</small>"
+		"			<hr />"
+		"			<i>LUFA Version: </i>" LUFA_VERSION_STRING
+		"		</p>"
+		"	</body>"
+		"</html>";
+
+
+/** Initializes the Webserver application, opening the appropriate HTTP port in the TCP handler and registering the application
+ *  callback routine for packets sent to the HTTP protocol port.
+ */
+void Webserver_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Open the HTTP port in the TCP protocol so that HTTP connections to the device can be established */
+	TCP_SetPortState(TCP_PORT_HTTP, TCP_Port_Open, Webserver_ApplicationCallback);
+}
+
+/** Indicates if a given request equals the given HTTP command.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] RequestHeader  HTTP request made by the host
+ *  \param[in] Command        HTTP command to compare the request to
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command matches the request, false otherwise
+ */
+static bool IsHTTPCommand(uint8_t* RequestHeader, char* Command)
+{
+	/* Returns true if the non null terminated string in RequestHeader matches the null terminated string Command */
+	return (strncmp((char*)RequestHeader, Command, strlen(Command)) == 0);
+}
+
+/** Application callback routine, executed each time the TCP processing task runs. This callback determines what request
+ *  has been made (if any), and serves up appropriate responses.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ConnectionState  Pointer to a TCP Connection State structure giving connection information
+ *  \param[in,out] Buffer       Pointer to the application's send/receive packet buffer
+ */
+void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer)
+{
+	char*          BufferDataStr = (char*)Buffer->Data;
+	static uint8_t PageBlock     = 0;
+	
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received on the HTTP port from a remote host */
+	if (TCP_APP_HAS_RECEIVED_PACKET(Buffer))
+	{
+		if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET"))
+		{
+			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "GET / "))
+			{
+				PageBlock = 0;
+
+				/* Copy the HTTP 200 response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
+				
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+
+				/* Lock the buffer to Device->Host transmissions only while we send the page contents */
+				TCP_APP_CAPTURE_BUFFER(Buffer);
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP 404 response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
+				
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+				
+				/* All data sent, close the connection */
+				TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+			}
+		}
+		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD"))
+		{
+			if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "HEAD / "))
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP200Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Copy the HTTP response header into the packet buffer */
+				strcpy_P(BufferDataStr, HTTP404Header);
+
+				/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+				TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, strlen(BufferDataStr));			
+			}
+			
+			/* All data sent, close the connection */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+		else if (IsHTTPCommand(Buffer->Data, "TRACE"))
+		{
+			/* Echo the host's query back to the host */
+			TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Buffer->Length);
+			
+			/* All data sent, close the connection */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* Unknown request, just clear the buffer (drop the packet) */
+			TCP_APP_CLEAR_BUFFER(Buffer);
+		}
+	}
+	else if (TCP_APP_HAVE_CAPTURED_BUFFER(Buffer))
+	{
+		uint16_t RemLength = strlen_P(&HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE]);
+		uint16_t Length;
+	
+		/* Determine the length of the loaded block */
+		Length = ((RemLength > HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE) ? HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE : RemLength);
+
+		/* Copy the next buffer sized block of the page to the packet buffer */
+		strncpy_P(BufferDataStr, &HTTPPage[PageBlock * HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE], Length);
+		
+		/* Send the buffer contents to the host */
+		TCP_APP_SEND_BUFFER(Buffer, Length);
+
+		/* Check to see if the entire page has been sent */
+		if (PageBlock++ == (sizeof(HTTPPage) / HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE))
+		{
+			/* Unlock the buffer so that the host can fill it with future packets */
+			TCP_APP_RELEASE_BUFFER(Buffer);
+			
+			/* Close the connection to the host */
+			TCP_APP_CLOSECONNECTION(ConnectionState);
+		}
+	}
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h
index be96f7f34..3ba4186ea 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/Lib/Webserver.h
@@ -1,55 +1,55 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for Webserver.c.

- */

- 

-#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_

-#define _WEBSERVER_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>

-		

-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>

-		

-		#include "TCP.h"

-	

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** Maximum size of a HTTP response per transmission */

-		#define  HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE     128

-	

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		void Webserver_Init(void);

-		void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer);

-

-#endif

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Webserver.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_
+#define _WEBSERVER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		
+		#include "TCP.h"
+	
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Maximum size of a HTTP response per transmission */
+		#define  HTTP_REPLY_BLOCK_SIZE     128
+	
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void Webserver_Init(void);
+		void Webserver_ApplicationCallback(TCP_ConnectionState_t* ConnectionState, TCP_ConnectionBuffer_t* Buffer);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c
index 14016aa64..76c49068e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.c
@@ -1,136 +1,136 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernet demo. This file contains the main tasks of

- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.

- */

-

-#include "RNDISEthernet.h"

-

-/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is

- *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class

- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.

- */

-USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface =

-	{

-		.Config =

-			{

-				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,

-

-				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,

-				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,

-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,

-

-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,

-				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,

-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,

-

-				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,

-				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,

-				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,

-				

-				.AdapterVendorDescription       = "LUFA RNDIS Demo Adapter",

-				.AdapterMACAddress              = {ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS},

-			},

-	};

-

-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial

- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.

- */

-int main(void)

-{

-	SetupHardware();

-

-	TCP_Init();

-	Webserver_Init();

-

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);

-	sei();

-

-	for (;;)

-	{

-		if (Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.FrameIN.FrameInBuffer)

-		{

-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);

-			Ethernet_ProcessPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.FrameIN, &Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.FrameOUT);

-			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);

-		}

-

-		TCP_TCPTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);

-

-		RNDIS_Device_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);

-		USB_USBTask();

-	}

-}

-

-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */

-void SetupHardware(void)

-{

-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */

-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);

-	wdt_disable();

-

-	/* Disable clock division */

-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);

-

-	/* Hardware Initialization */

-	LEDs_Init();

-	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);

-	USB_Init();

-}

-

-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */

-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)

-{

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);

-}

-

-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */

-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)

-{

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);

-}

-

-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */

-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)

-{

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);

-

-	if (!(RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface)))

-	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);

-}

-

-/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */

-void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)

-{

-	RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the RNDISEthernet demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "RNDISEthernet.h"
+
+/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
+
+				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
+				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+				
+				.AdapterVendorDescription       = "LUFA RNDIS Demo Adapter",
+				.AdapterMACAddress              = {ADAPTER_MAC_ADDRESS},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	TCP_Init();
+	Webserver_Init();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.FrameIN.FrameInBuffer)
+		{
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+			Ethernet_ProcessPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.FrameIN, &Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface.State.FrameOUT);
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+		}
+
+		TCP_TCPTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
+
+		RNDIS_Device_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	if (!(RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface)))
+	  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Unhandled Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void)
+{
+	RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h
index c6c092ccc..a689ee819 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.h
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-      www.fourwalledcubicle.com

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for RNDISEthernet.c.

- */

- 

-#ifndef _RNDISETHERNET_H_

-#define _RNDISETHERNET_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-		#include <avr/wdt.h>

-		#include <avr/power.h>

-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>

-		#include <string.h>

-

-		#include "Descriptors.h"

-

-		#include "Lib/Ethernet.h"

-		#include "Lib/TCP.h"

-		#include "Lib/ARP.h"

-		#include "Lib/Webserver.h"

-

-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */

-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1

-

-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */

-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)

-

-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */

-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */

-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)

-

-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */

-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2

-		

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		void SetupHardware(void);

-

-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);

-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);

-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);

-		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);

-	

-#endif

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2010.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+      www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RNDISEthernet.c.
+ */
+ 
+#ifndef _RNDISETHERNET_H_
+#define _RNDISETHERNET_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/Ethernet.h"
+		#include "Lib/TCP.h"
+		#include "Lib/ARP.h"
+		#include "Lib/Webserver.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/RNDIS.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+		
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+	
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt
index b897f1bb5..2175ecb7f 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/RNDISEthernet.txt
@@ -1,122 +1,122 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

- 

-/** \mainpage RNDIS Class Ethernet Demo (with Webserver/Telnet)

- *

- *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:

- *

- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.

- *

- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs

- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs

- *

- *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:

- *

- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>

- *    <td>Device</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>

- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr> 

- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>

- *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>

- *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>

- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 

- *

- *  Remote Network Driver Interface demonstration application.

- *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing

- *  a CDC RNDIS device acting as a simple network interface for

- *  ethernet packet exchange. RNDIS is a proprietary Microsoft

- *  standard; this demo will only work on Windows 2000 (manually

- *  patched with the Microsoft RNDIS hotfix) and above (with no

- *  manual patches), or on the latest Linux kernels.

- *  

- *  Before running, you will need to install the INF file that

- *  is located in the RNDISEthernet project directory. This will

- *  enable Windows to use its inbuilt RNDIS drivers, negating the

- *  need for special Windows drivers for the device. To install,

- *  right-click the .INF file and choose the Install option. If

- *  Windows 2000 is used, the Microsoft INF file in the hotfix

- *  will need to be altered to use the VID/PID of the demo and

- *  then chosen instead of the LUFA RNDIS INF file when prompted.

- *  

- *  When enumerated, this demo will install as a new network

- *  adapter which ethernet packets can be sent to and received

- *  from. Running on top of the adapter is a very simple TCP/IP

- *  stack with a HTTP webserver and TELNET host which can be

- *  accessed through a web browser at IP address 10.0.0.2:80 or

- *  through a TELNET client at 10.0.0.2:25. This device also supports

- *  ping echos via the ICMP protocol.

- *  

- *  \note The TCP/IP stack in this demo has a number of limitations

- *  and should serve as an example only - it is not fully featured nor

- *  compliant to the TCP/IP specification. For complete projects, it is 

- *  recommended that it be replaced with an external open source TCP/IP

- *  stack that is feature complete, such as the uIP stack.

- *

- *  \section SSec_Options Project Options

- *

- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>

- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>

- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>NO_DECODE_ETHERNET</td>

- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>

- *    <td>When defined, received Ethernet headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>NO_DECODE_ARP</td>

- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>

- *    <td>When defined, received ARP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>NO_DECODE_IP</td>

- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>

- *    <td>When defined, received IP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>NO_DECODE_ICMP</td>

- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>

- *    <td>When defined, received ICMP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>NO_DECODE_TCP</td>

- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>

- *    <td>When defined, received TCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>NO_DECODE_UDP</td>

- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>

- *    <td>When defined, received UDP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>NO_DECODE_DHCP</td>

- *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>

- *    <td>When defined, received DHCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+ 
+/** \mainpage RNDIS Class Ethernet Demo (with Webserver/Telnet)
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr> 
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description: 
+ *
+ *  Remote Network Driver Interface demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing
+ *  a CDC RNDIS device acting as a simple network interface for
+ *  ethernet packet exchange. RNDIS is a proprietary Microsoft
+ *  standard; this demo will only work on Windows 2000 (manually
+ *  patched with the Microsoft RNDIS hotfix) and above (with no
+ *  manual patches), or on the latest Linux kernels.
+ *  
+ *  Before running, you will need to install the INF file that
+ *  is located in the RNDISEthernet project directory. This will
+ *  enable Windows to use its inbuilt RNDIS drivers, negating the
+ *  need for special Windows drivers for the device. To install,
+ *  right-click the .INF file and choose the Install option. If
+ *  Windows 2000 is used, the Microsoft INF file in the hotfix
+ *  will need to be altered to use the VID/PID of the demo and
+ *  then chosen instead of the LUFA RNDIS INF file when prompted.
+ *  
+ *  When enumerated, this demo will install as a new network
+ *  adapter which ethernet packets can be sent to and received
+ *  from. Running on top of the adapter is a very simple TCP/IP
+ *  stack with a HTTP webserver and TELNET host which can be
+ *  accessed through a web browser at IP address 10.0.0.2:80 or
+ *  through a TELNET client at 10.0.0.2:25. This device also supports
+ *  ping echos via the ICMP protocol.
+ *  
+ *  \note The TCP/IP stack in this demo has a number of limitations
+ *  and should serve as an example only - it is not fully featured nor
+ *  compliant to the TCP/IP specification. For complete projects, it is 
+ *  recommended that it be replaced with an external open source TCP/IP
+ *  stack that is feature complete, such as the uIP stack.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ETHERNET</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received Ethernet headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ARP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received ARP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_IP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received IP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_ICMP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received ICMP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_TCP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received TCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_UDP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received UDP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_DECODE_DHCP</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile CDEFS</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, received DHCP headers will not be decoded and printed to the device serial port.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
  */
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/makefile
index 9dc1ce2b6..f0648dd27 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/RNDISEthernet/makefile
@@ -1,750 +1,750 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-

-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.

-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<

-#

-# Released to the Public Domain

-#

-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:

-# Peter Fleury

-# Tim Henigan

-# Colin O'Flynn

-# Reiner Patommel

-# Markus Pfaff

-# Sander Pool

-# Frederik Rouleau

-# Carlos Lamas

-# Dean Camera

-# Opendous Inc.

-# Denver Gingerich

-#

-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# On command line:

-#

-# make all = Make software.

-#

-# make clean = Clean out built project files.

-#

-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.

-#

-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.

-#

-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.

-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!

-#

-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must

-#            have dfu-programmer installed).

-#

-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must

-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).

-#

-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer

-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).

-#

-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP

-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).

-#

-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have

-#                DoxyGen installed)

-#

-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 

-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.

-#

-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.

-#

-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting

-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.

-#

-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".

-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-

-# MCU name

-MCU = at90usb1287

-

-

-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring

-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 

-# "Board" inside the application directory.

-BOARD  = USBKEY

-

-

-# Processor frequency.

-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 

-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 

-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done

-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.

-#

-#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by

-#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value

-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to

-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate

-#     software delays.

-F_CPU = 8000000

-

-

-# Input clock frequency.

-#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 

-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may

-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the

-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed

-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'

-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your

-#     source code.

-#

-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the

-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.

-F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)

-

-

-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)

-FORMAT = ihex

-

-

-# Target file name (without extension).

-TARGET = RNDISEthernet

-

-

-# Object files directory

-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make

-#     this an empty or blank macro!

-OBJDIR = .

-

-

-# Path to the LUFA library

-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..

-

-

-# LUFA library compile-time options

-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY

-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8

-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1

-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS

-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"

-

-

-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)

-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \

-      Descriptors.c                                               \

-	  Lib/Ethernet.c                                              \

-	  Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c                                      \

-	  Lib/ICMP.c                                                  \

-	  Lib/TCP.c                                                   \

-	  Lib/UDP.c                                                   \

-	  Lib/DHCP.c                                                  \

-	  Lib/ARP.c                                                   \

-	  Lib/IP.c                                                    \

-	  Lib/Webserver.c                                             \

-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \

-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \

-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \

-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \

-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \

-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \

-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \

- 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \

-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \

-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \

-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \

-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \

-	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c          \

-

-

-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)

-CPPSRC = 

-

-

-# List Assembler source files here.

-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s

-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler

-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!

-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,

-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does

-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.

-ASRC =

-

-

-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 

-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.

-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)

-OPT = s

-

-

-# Debugging format.

-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.

-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.

-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.

-DEBUG = dwarf-2

-

-

-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.

-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.

-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.

-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.

-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/

-

-

-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.

-#     c89   = "ANSI" C

-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions

-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)

-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions

-CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99

-

-

-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources

-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)

-CDEFS += -DNO_DECODE_ETHERNET -DNO_DECODE_ARP -DNO_DECODE_ICMP

-CDEFS += -DNO_DECODE_IP -DNO_DECODE_TCP -DNO_DECODE_UDP -DNO_DECODE_DHCP -DNO_DECODE_DNS

-

-

-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources

-ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)

-

-

-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources

-CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL

-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS

-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS

-

-

-

-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------

-#  -g*:          generate debugging information

-#  -O*:          optimization level

-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation

-#  -Wall...:     warning level

-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.

-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing

-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)

-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)

-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)

-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char

-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields

-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections

-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions

-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct

-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums

-CFLAGS += -Wall

-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes

-CFLAGS += -Wundef

-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time

-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code

-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare

-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)

-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))

-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)

-

-

-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------

-#  -g*:          generate debugging information

-#  -O*:          optimization level

-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation

-#  -Wall...:     warning level

-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.

-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing

-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)

-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)

-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)

-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char

-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields

-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct

-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums

-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions

-CPPFLAGS += -Wall

-CFLAGS += -Wundef

-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls

-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time

-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes

-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code

-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare

-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)

-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))

-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)

-

-

-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------

-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.

-#  -adhlns:   create listing

-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that

-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames

-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source

-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]

-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 

-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.

-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100

-

-

-#---------------- Library Options ----------------

-# Minimalistic printf version

-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min

-

-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)

-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt

-

-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.

-PRINTF_LIB = 

-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)

-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)

-

-

-# Minimalistic scanf version

-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min

-

-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)

-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt

-

-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.

-SCANF_LIB = 

-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)

-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)

-

-

-MATH_LIB = -lm

-

-

-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.

-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.

-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.

-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.

-EXTRALIBDIRS = 

-

-

-

-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------

-

-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),

-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).

-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff

-

-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),

-# only used for heap (malloc()).

-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff

-

-EXTMEMOPTS =

-

-

-

-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------

-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.

-#    -Map:      create map file

-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file

-LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref

-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 

-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections

-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)

-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))

-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)

-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x

-

-

-

-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------

-

-# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 

-# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500

-#

-# Type: avrdude -c ?

-# to get a full listing.

-#

-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII

-

-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.

-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb

-

-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex

-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep

-

-

-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.

-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,

-# see avrdude manual.

-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y

-

-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be

-# performed after programming the device.

-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V

-

-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug

-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 

-# to submit bug reports.

-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v

-

-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)

-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)

-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)

-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)

-

-

-

-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------

-

-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.

-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)

-

-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.

-# DEBUG_UI = gdb

-DEBUG_UI = insight

-

-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.

-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice

-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr

-

-# GDB Init Filename.

-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit

-

-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG

-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1

-

-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.

-DEBUG_PORT = 4242

-

-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally

-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 

-#     avarice is running on a different computer.

-DEBUG_HOST = localhost

-

-

-

-#============================================================================

-

-

-# Define programs and commands.

-SHELL = sh

-CC = avr-gcc

-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy

-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump

-SIZE = avr-size

-AR = avr-ar rcs

-NM = avr-nm

-AVRDUDE = avrdude

-REMOVE = rm -f

-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf

-COPY = cp

-WINSHELL = cmd

-

-# Define Messages

-# English

-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none

-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------

-MSG_END = --------  end  --------

-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 

-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:

-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:

-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:

-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:

-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:

-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:

-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:

-MSG_LINKING = Linking:

-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:

-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:

-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:

-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:

-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:

-

-

-

-

-# Define all object files.

-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 

-

-# Define all listing files.

-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 

-

-

-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.

-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d

-

-

-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.

-# Add target processor to flags.

-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)

-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)

-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)

-

-

-

-

-

-# Default target.

-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end

-

-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.

-build: elf hex eep lss sym

-#build: lib

-

-

-elf: $(TARGET).elf

-hex: $(TARGET).hex

-eep: $(TARGET).eep

-lss: $(TARGET).lss

-sym: $(TARGET).sym

-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a

-lib: $(LIBNAME)

-

-

-

-# Eye candy.

-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on

-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.

-begin:

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)

-

-end:

-	@echo $(MSG_END)

-	@echo

-

-

-# Display size of file.

-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex

-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf

-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )

-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )

-

-sizebefore:

-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \

-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi

-

-sizeafter:

-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \

-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi

-

-$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:

-	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst

-

-checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst

-	@echo

-	@echo Checking for invalid events...

-	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \

-	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true

-	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp

-	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi

-

-showliboptions:

-	@echo

-	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----

-	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \

-		echo $$i; \

-	done

-	@echo --------------------------------------

-

-showtarget:

-	@echo

-	@echo --------- Target Information ---------

-	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)

-	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)

-	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master

-	@echo --------------------------------------

-	

-

-# Display compiler version information.

-gccversion : 

-	@$(CC) --version

-

-

-# Program the device.  

-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep

-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)

-

-flip: $(TARGET).hex

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0

-

-dfu: $(TARGET).hex

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset

-

-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep

-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex

-

-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset

-

-

-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:

-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 

-#     a breakpoint at main().

-gdb-config: 

-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)

-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-endif

-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-

-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf

-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)

-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.

-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \

-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)

-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause

-

-else

-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \

-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)

-endif

-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)

-

-

-

-

-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.

-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging

-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000

-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000

-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000

-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000

-

-

-

-coff: $(TARGET).elf

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof

-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof

-

-

-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof

-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof

-

-

-

-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.

-%.hex: %.elf

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@

-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@

-

-%.eep: %.elf

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@

-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \

-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0

-

-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.

-%.lss: %.elf

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@

-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@

-

-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.

-%.sym: %.elf

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@

-	$(NM) -n $< > $@

-

-

-

-# Create library from object files.

-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a

-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)

-%.a: $(OBJ)

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@

-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)

-

-

-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.

-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf

-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)

-%.elf: $(OBJ)

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@

-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)

-

-

-# Compile: create object files from C source files.

-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<

-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 

-

-

-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.

-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<

-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 

-

-

-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.

-%.s : %.c

-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@

-

-

-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.

-%.s : %.cpp

-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@

-

-

-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.

-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<

-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@

-

-

-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.

-%.i : %.c

-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 

-	

-

-# Target: clean project.

-clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end

-

-clean_binary:

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex

-	

-clean_list:

-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss

-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)

-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)

-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)

-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)

-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)

-	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp

-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep

-

-doxygen:

-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...

-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf

-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.

-

-clean_doxygen:

-	rm -rf Documentation

-

-# Create object files directory

-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)

-

-

-# Include the dependency files.

--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)

-

-

-# Listing of phony targets.

-.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \

-showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \

-gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \

-program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \

+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging, 
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called 
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD  = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to 
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_CLOCK below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_CLOCK after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the 
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = RNDISEthernet
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+      Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  Lib/Ethernet.c                                              \
+	  Lib/ProtocolDecoders.c                                      \
+	  Lib/ICMP.c                                                  \
+	  Lib/TCP.c                                                   \
+	  Lib/UDP.c                                                   \
+	  Lib/DHCP.c                                                  \
+	  Lib/ARP.c                                                   \
+	  Lib/IP.c                                                    \
+	  Lib/Webserver.c                                             \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c         \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c        \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c           \
+ 	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c               \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/USBInterrupt.c       \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c  \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c            \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c           \
+	  $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Device/RNDIS.c          \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC = 
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s]. 
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) $(LUFA_OPTS)
+CDEFS += -DNO_DECODE_ETHERNET -DNO_DECODE_ARP -DNO_DECODE_ICMP
+CDEFS += -DNO_DECODE_IP -DNO_DECODE_TCP -DNO_DECODE_UDP -DNO_DECODE_DHCP -DNO_DECODE_DNS
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex 
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB = 
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB = 
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS = 
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax 
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd 
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude> 
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when 
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before: 
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) 
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) 
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkinvalidevents showliboptions showtarget sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst:
+	@$(MAKE) -C $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/ LUFA_Events.lst
+
+checkinvalidevents: $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst
+	@echo
+	@echo Checking for invalid events...
+	@$(shell) avr-nm $(OBJ) | sed -n -e 's/^.*EVENT_/EVENT_/p' | \
+	                 grep -F -v --file=$(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/LUFA_Events.lst > InvalidEvents.tmp || true
+	@sed -n -e 's/^/  WARNING - INVALID EVENT NAME: /p' InvalidEvents.tmp
+	@if test -s InvalidEvents.tmp; then exit 1; fi
+
+showliboptions:
+	@echo
+	@echo ---- Compile Time Library Options ----
+	@for i in $(LUFA_OPTS:-D%=%); do \
+		echo $$i; \
+	done
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+
+showtarget:
+	@echo
+	@echo --------- Target Information ---------
+	@echo AVR Model: $(MCU)
+	@echo Board:     $(BOARD)
+	@echo Clock:     $(F_CPU)Hz CPU, $(F_CLOCK)Hz Master
+	@echo --------------------------------------
+	
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion : 
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.  
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set 
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config: 
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@ 
+	
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	
+clean_list:
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVE) InvalidEvents.tmp
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkinvalidevents showliboptions    \
+showtarget begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter  \
+gccversion build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff \
+program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee clean debug       \
 clean_list clean_binary gdb-config doxygen
\ No newline at end of file